R
EN
FR
ES
IN-DASH GPS NAVIGATION RECEIVER
INA-W910
• OWNER’S MANUAL
Please read before using this equipment.
• MODE D’EMPLOI
Veuillez lire avant d’utiliser cet appareil.
• MANUAL DE OPERACIÓN
Léalo antes de utilizar este equipo.
ALPINE ELECTRONICS MARKETING, INC.
1-1-8 Nishi Gotanda,
ALPINE ELECTRONICS OF AUSTRALIA PTY. LTD.
161-165 Princes Highway, Hallam
Victoria 3803, Australia
ALPINE ITALIA S.p.A.
Viale C. Colombo 8, 20090 Trezzano
Sul Naviglio (MI), Italy
Shinagawa-ku,
Tokyo 141-0031, Japan
Phone 03-5496-8231
Phone 03-8787-1200
Phone 02-484781
ALPINE ELECTRONICS GmbH
Wilhelm-Wagenfeld-Str. 1-3, 80807 München, Germany
Phone 089-32 42 640
ALPINE ELECTRONICS DE ESPAÑA, S.A.
Portal de Gamarra 36, Pabellón, 32
01013 Vitoria (Alava)-APDO 133, Spain
Phone 945-283588
ALPINE ELECTRONICS OF AMERICA, INC.
19145 Gramercy Place, Torrance,
California 90501, U.S.A.
Phone 1-800-ALPINE-1 (1-800-257-4631)
1-888-NAV-HELP (1-888-628-4357)
ALPINE ELECTRONICS OF U.K. LTD.
Alpine House
Fletchamstead Highway, Coventry CV4 9TW, U.K.
Phone 0870-33 33 763
ALPINE ELECTRONICS (BENELUX) GmbH
Leuvensesteenweg 510-B6,
1930 Zaventem, Belgium
ALPINE ELECTRONICS OF CANADA, INC.
777 Supertest Road, Toronto,
Phone 02-725-13 15
ALPINE ELECTRONICS FRANCE S.A.R.L.
(RCS PONTOISE B 338 101 280)
98, Rue de la Belle Etoile, Z.I. Paris Nord Il,
B.P. 50016, 95945 Roissy Charles de Gaulle
Cedex, France
Ontario M3J 2M9, Canada
Phone 1-800-ALPINE-1 (1-800-257-4631)
1-888-NAV-HELP (1-888-628-4357)
Phone 01-48638989
Designed by ALPINE Japan
68-16909Z48-B
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
ENGLISH
Contents
Set a Destination from the
END USER LICENSE AGREEMENT
Address Book ...........................................27
(Microsoft) .................................................... 9
Finding Alternative Routes to the
Destination ...............................................29
Saving a Destination into the
Address Book ...........................................30
Inserting/Removing the SD Memory Card
Navigation System) ..................................... 18
Turn on the GUIDEVIEW WINDOW™
Mode ........................................................33
Displaying the Numeric Keypad
Input Screen ............................................. 20
3-EN
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Searching Directly by Chapter or
Track Number ............................................ 49
Scroll to Move the Page Forward or
Backward .................................................... 49
Storing the tag information of
HD Radio stations ....................................... 39
Switching the Subtitles
(Subtitle Language) .................................... 50
Storing the tag information of
RBDS stations ............................................. 41
Changing the Display
(Compulsory Analog Radio mode only) ..... 41
Setting the Rating Level
(Parental Lock) ........................................ 57
Setting the DVD-Audio
Selecting Folders
(concerning MP3/WMA/AAC) ................... 43
Displaying the Menu Operation
Mode Screen ........................................... 47
Playback Mode ....................................... 59
Playing MP3/WMA/AAC Data
(File Play Mode) ...................................... 59
Setting the compressed File
Playback Data .......................................... 60
Finding the Beginnings of
Chapters/Tracks .......................................... 48
Forward/reverse frame-by-frame
Playback ..................................................... 48
4-EN
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Setting the Brightness of the
Backlighting ............................................. 63
Adjusting the Minimum Level of
Backlight .................................................. 63
Setting the Function Guide display
ON/OFF ................................................... 63
Setting the Response Slope for the
High Range Speaker (TW Setup) ............ 72
Setting the MX Level
(Media Xpander) ...................................... 72
Adjusting the Parametric Equalizer Curve
(P-EQ) ...................................................... 72
Adjusting the Graphic Equalizer Curve
(G-EQ) ..................................................... 73
Setting the Time Correction Unit
(T.Corr Parameter) ................................... 73
Adjusting the Crossover Settings
Adjusting the Dimmer of Button Lighting
(X-OVER) ................................................ 73
at Night ....................................................65
External Audio Processor Operation
(Optional)
Switching the function of the
Adjustment Procedure for
Dolby Surround ........................................... 77
remote sensor ........................................... 66
Setting the BLUETOOTH Connection
(BLUETOOTH IN) .................................. 67
Set MX Mode of the External Audio
Processor .................................................. 78
Performing Time Correction Manually
(Time Correction) .................................... 79
Managing Artist, Song and Sports
Team Alerts ................................................. 69
5-EN
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
How to connect to a BLUETOOTH
SiriusXM Satellite Radio Operation
(Optional)
compatible device (Pairing) ..................... 83
Receiving Channels with the SiriusXM Tuner
(Optional) .................................................... 93
Checking the SiriusXM Radio
ID Number .................................................. 94
Adjusting the volume when receiving
a Call ........................................................... 86
Storing your favorite Artist/
Song for Alerts ............................................ 95
Redialing a Number in Dialed
Calls History ............................................ 86
Dialing a Number in Received
Calls History ............................................ 87
Dialing a Number in Missed
Calls History ............................................ 87
Dialing a Number In the Phone Book
(Phone Book) ........................................... 87
Dialing a Number Using Direct
Using Jump Memory and Jump
Recall function ............................................ 97
Flash Memory/Portable audio player
(Optional)
Dial Input ................................................. 88
Phone Book Alphabet
Searching Function .................................. 88
Searching by Explorer (File Name) mode
(Flash Memory only) ............................. 100
Selecting Playlist/Artist/Album/Genre/
Composer (Tag search mode only) ............ 100
Display the rear view video while
the car is in reverse .................................. 91
Adjusting Alarm Volume
Select the desired Folder
(Folder up/down) ....................................... 100
Creating the playlist from the Artist/Album
(Tag search mode only) ............................. 100
(HCE-C300R only) .................................. 91
Adjusting Detection Sensitivity
(HCE-C300R only) .................................. 92
6-EN
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Alphabet Skip Function
(Tag search mode only) .............................101
About MP3/WMA/AAC File of
Flash Memory ...........................................101
Calibration when connected to
HCE-C300R .............................................. 124
Selecting Playlist/Artist/Album/Genre/
Composer/Episode/Category .....................103
7-EN
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Operating Instructions
FCC COMPLIANCE STATEMENT
This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the
limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to part 15 of the FCC
Rules. These limits are designed to provide more reasonable
protection against harmful interference in a residential
PRECAUTIONS AND
NOTICES
installation, and are more stringent than “outdoor” requirements.
Operation is subjected to the following two conditions: (1) This
device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device
must accept any interference received, including interference
that may cause undesired operation.
IMPORTANT INFORMATION
This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio
frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance
with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio
communications. However, there is no guarantee that
interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this
equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television
reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment
off and on, you are encouraged to try to correct the interference
by one of the following measures:
PLEASE READ CAREFULLY BEFORE USING THIS
PRODUCT
This product is intended to provide turn by turn instructions to
get you to a desired destination. Please make certain that all
persons using this navigation system carefully read these
precautions and the following instructions fully.
•
This product is not a substitute for your personal judgment. Any
route suggestions made by this navigation system may never
supersede any local traffic regulations or your personal judgment
and/or knowledge of safe driving practices. Do not follow route
suggestions if the navigation system instructs you to perform an
unsafe or illegal maneuver, places you in an unsafe situation, or
routes you into an area which you consider unsafe.
•
•
•
Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.
Increase the separation between the equipment and the receiver.
Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that
to which the receiver is connected.
•
•
Glance at the screen only when necessary and safe to do so. If
prolonged viewing of the screen is necessary, pull over in a safe and
legal manner and location.
Do not input destinations, change settings, or access any functions
requiring a prolonged view of the monitor and/or remote control
while you are driving. Pull over in a safe and legal manner and
location before attempting to access the system.
•
Consult an experienced radio/TV technician.
•
•
Do not use the navigation system to route you to emergency services.
Not all locations of emergency services such as police and fire
stations, hospitals and clinics are contained in the database. Please
use your own judgment and ask for directions in these situations.
The map database used in the navigation system is the most recent
map data available at the time of production. Because of changes in
streets and neighborhoods, there may be situations where the
navigation system is not able to route you to your desired destination.
In these cases, use your own judgment.
•
The map database is designed to provide you with route suggestions
and does not take into account the relative safety of a suggested route
or of factors which may affect the time required to reach your
destination. The system does not reflect road closures or
construction, road characteristics (i.e. type of road surface, slope or
grade, weight or height restrictions, etc.), traffic congestion, weather
conditions, or any other factors which may affect the safety or timing
of your driving experience. Use your own personal judgment if the
navigation system is unable to provide you with an alternate route.
There may be situations where the navigation system displays the
vehicle’s location erroneously. Use your own driving judgment in
this situation, taking into account current driving conditions. Please
be aware that in this situation the navigation system should correct
the vehicle’s position automatically. However, there may be times
where you may have to correct the position yourself. If this is the
case, pull over in a safe and legal manner and location before
attempting operation.
•
•
Make certain that the volume level of the navigation system is set to a
level which still allows you to hear outside traffic and emergency
vehicles.
If there is anything in the manual about the operation of
the navigation system which you are uncertain about,
please contact your local Alpine authorized navigation
dealer or Alpine at 1-888-NAV-HELP (1-888-628-4357)
before using the navigation system.
8-EN
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
USER AGREEMENT
END USER LICENSE AGREEMENT
(Microsoft)
In using this Navigation System (hereinafter referred to as
“System”), which includes Alpine Electronics, Inc. (“Alpine”)
Specifications, Space Machine, Inc. (“Space Machine”)
Software and NAVTEQ North America, LLC. (“NAVTEQ”)
Database, you are bound by the terms and conditions set forth
below. By breaking the seal on the System and using your copy
of the System, you have demonstrated your agreement to the
terms and conditions of this Agreement. You should, therefore,
make sure that you read and understand the following
provisions.
You have acquired a device (“DEVICE”) that includes software
licensed by Alpine Electronics, Inc. (collectively “ALPINE”) from
an affiliate of Microsoft Corporation (collectively “MS”). Those
installed software products of MS origin, as well as associated
media, printed materials, and “online” or electronic
documentation (“SOFTWARE”) are protected by international
intellectual property laws and treaties. The SOFTWARE is
licensed, not sold. All rights reserved.
IF YOU DO NOT AGREE TO THIS END USER LICENSE
AGREEMENT (“EULA”), DO NOT USE THE DEVICE OR COPY
THE SOFTWARE INSTEAD, PROMPTLY CONTACT ALPINE FOR
INSTRUCTIONS ON RETURN OF THE UNUSED DEVICE(S) FOR
A REFUND. ANY USE OF THE SOFTWARE, INCLUDING BUT
NOT LIMITED TO USE ON THE DEVICE, WILL CONSTITUTE
YOUR AGREEMENT TO THIS EULA (OR RATIFICATION OF ANY
PREVIOUS CONSENT).
The System may not be copied, duplicated or otherwise
modified, in whole or in part, without the express written
permission of Alpine, Space Machine and NAVTEQ.
The System may not be transferred or sublicensed to any third
party for profit, rent or loan or licensed for reuse in any manner.
The System may not be decompiled, reverse engineered or
otherwise disassembled, in whole or in part.
The System may not be used in a network or by any other
manner of simultaneous use in multiple systems.
GRANT OF SOFTWARE LICENSE,
This EULA grants you the following license: You may use the
SOFTWARE only on the DEVICE.
The System is intended solely for personal use (or internal use
where the end-user is a business) by the consumer.
The System is not to be used for commercial purposes.
Neither Alpine, Space Machine nor NAVTEQ guarantees to the
customer that the System meet the specific objectives of the
user.
Neither Alpine, Space Machine nor NAVTEQ shall be
responsible for any damages caused by the use of the System to
the actual user and to any third party.
The warranty on the System shall not extend to an exchange or
refund due to misspelling, omission of letters, or any other
cosmetic discrepancy in layout found in the System.
The right to use the System shall expire either when the user
destroys this software, or when any of the terms for use is
violated and Alpine, Space Machine and/or NAVTEQ exercise
the option to revoke the license to use this software.
The terms and conditions hereof apply to all subsequent users
and owner’s as well as to the original purchaser.
NOT FAULT TOLERANT.
THE SOFTWARE IS NOT FAULT TOLERANT. ALPINE HAS
INDEPENDENTLY DETERMINED HOW TO USE THE SOFTWARE
IN THE DEVEICE, AND MS HAS RELIED UPON ALPINE TO
CONDUCT SUFFICIENT TESTING TO DETERMINE THAT THE
SOFTWARE IS SUITALE FOR SUCH USE.
NO WARRANTIES FOR THE SOFTWARE,
THE SOFTWARE is provided “AS IS” and with all faults. THE
ENTIRE RISK AS TO SATISFACTORY QUALITY,
PERFORMANCE, ACCURACY, AND EFFORT (INCLUDING
LACK OF NEGALIGENCE) IS WITH YOU. ALSO, THERE IS NO
WARRANTY AGAINST INTERFERENCE WTH YOUR
ENJOYMENT OF THE SOFTWARE OR AGAINST
INFRINGEMENT. IF YOU HAVE RECEIVED ANY WARRANTIES
REGARDING THE DEVICE OR SOFTWARE THOSE
WARRANTIES DO NOT ORIGINATE FROM, AND ARE NOT
BINDING ON, MS.
The NAVTEQ Database may include or reflect data of licensors,
including Her Majesty The Queen in right of CANADA. Such data
is licensed on an “AS IS” basis. The licensors, including Her
Majesty The Queen, make no guarantees, representations or
warranties respecting such data, either express or implied,
arising by law or otherwise, accuracy or fitness for a particular
purpose.
The licensors, including Her Majesty The Queen, shall not be
liable in respect of any claim, demand or action, irrespective of
the nature of the cause of the claim, demand or action alleging
any loss, injury or damages, direct or indirect, which may result
from the use or possession of the data or the NAVTEQ database.
The licensors, including Her Majesty The Queen, shall not be
liable in any way for loss of revenues or contracts, or any other
consequential loss of any kind resulting from any defect in the
data or the NAVTEQ database.
End User shall indemnify and save harmless the licensors,
including Her Majesty The Queen and the minister, and their
officers, employees and agents from and against any claim,
demand or action, irrespective of the nature of the cause of the
claim, demand or action, alleging loss, costs, expenses,
damages or injuries (including injuries resulting in death) arising
out of the use or possession of the data or the NAVTEQ
database.
NO LIABILITY FOR CERTAIN DAMAGES.
EXCEPTAS PROHIBITED BY LAW, MS SHALL HAVE NO
LIAVILITY FOR ANY INDIRECT, SPECIAL, CONSEQUENTIAL OR
THE SOFTWARE. THIS LIMITATION SHALL APPLY EVEN IF ANY
REMEDY FAILS OF ITS ESSENTIAL PURPOSE. IN NO EVENT
SHALL MS BE LIABLE FOR ANY AMOUNT IN EXCESS OF U.S.
TWO HUNDRED FIFTY DOLLARS (U.S. $250.00).
LIMITATIONS ON REVERSE ENGINEERING,
DECOMPILATION, AND DISASSEMBLY
You may not reverse engineer, decompile, or disassemble the
SOFTWARE, except and only to the extent that such activity is
expressly permitted by applicable law notwithstanding this
limitation.
9-EN
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
ADDITIONAL SOFTWARE/SERVICES.
TRADEMARKS.
The SOFTWARE may permit ALPINE, MS, Microsoft Corporation
or their affiliates to provide or make available to you SOFTWARE
updates, supplements, add-on components, or Internet – base
service components of the SOFTWARE after the date you obtain
your initial copy of the SOFTWARE (“Supplemental
Components”).
This EULA does not grant you any rights in connection with any
trademarks or service marks of ALPINE, MS, Microsoft
Corporation, their affiliates or suppliers.
PRODUCT SUPPORT.
Product support for the SOFTWARE is not provided by MS, its
parent corporation Microsoft Corporation, or their affiliates or
subsidiaries. For product support, please refer to ALPINE
support number provided in the documentation for the DEVICE.
Should you have any questions concerning this EULA, or if you
desire to contact ALPINE for any other reason, please refer to
the address provided in the documentation for the DEVICE.
•
If ALPINE provides or makes available to you Supplemental
Components and no other EULA terms are provided along
with the Supplemental Components, then the terms of this
EULA shall apply.
•
If MS, Microsoft Corporation or their affiliates make available
Supplemental Components, and no other EULA terms are
provided, then the terms of this EULA shall apply, except that
MS, Microsoft Corporation or affiliate entity providing the
Supplemental Component(s) shall be licensor of the
Supplemental Component(s).
SOFTWARE TRANSFER ALLOWED BUT WITH
RESTRICTIONS.
•
ALPINE, MS, Microsoft Corporation and their affiliates reserve
the right to discontinue any Internet-based services provided
to you or made available to you through the use of the
SOFTWARE.
You may permanently transfer rights under this EULA only as
part of a permanent sale or transfer of the Device, and only if the
recipient agrees to this EULA. If the SOFTWARE is an upgrade,
any transfer must also include all prior versions of the
SOFTWARE.
RECOVERY MEDIA.
EXPORT RESTRICTION.
If SOFTWARE is provided by ALPINE on separate media and
labeled “Recovery Media” you may use the Recovery Media
solely to restore or reinstall the SOFTWARE originally installed on
the DEVICE.
You acknowledge that SOFTWARE is of US-origin. You agree to
comply with all applicable international and national laws that
apply to the SOFTWARE, including the U.S. Export
Administration Regulations, as well as end-user, end-use and
country destination restrictions issued by U.S. and other
governments. For additional information on exporting the
SOFTWARE, see http://www.microsoft.com/exporting
UPGRADES.
If the SOFTWARE is provided by ALPINE separate from the
DEVICE on separate media or via web download or other
means, and is labeled “For Upgrade Purposes Only” you may
install one (1) copy of such SOFTWARE onto the DEVICE as a
replacement copy for the existing SOFTWARE, and use it in
accordance with this EULA, including any additional EULA terms
accompanying the upgrade SOFTWARE.
TERMINATION.
Without prejudice to any other rights, ALPINE or MS may
terminate this EULA if you fail to comply with the terms and
conditions of this EULA. In such event, you must destroy all
copies of the SOFTWARE and all of its component parts.
INTELLECTUAL PROPERTY RIGHTS.
All title and intellectual property rights in and to the SOFTWARE
(including but not limited to any images, photographs,
animations, video, audio, music, text and “applets,”
incorporated into the SOFTWARE), the accompanying printed
materials, and any copies of the SOFTWARE, are owned by MS,
Microsoft Corporation, their affiliates or suppliers. The
SOFTWARE is licensed, not sold.
You may not copy the printed materials accompanying the
SOFTWARE. All title and intellectual property rights in and to the
content which may be accessed through use of the SOFTWARE
is the property of the respective content owner and may be
protected by applicable copyright or other intellectual property
laws and treaties. This EULA grants you no rights to use such
content. All rights not specifically granted under this EULA are
reserved by MS, Microsoft Corporation, their affiliates and
suppliers. Use of any on-line services which may be accessed
through the SOFTWARE may be governed by the respective
terms of use relating to such services. If this SOFTWARE
contains documentation that is provided only in electronic form,
you may print one copy of such electronic documentation.
10-EN
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
KEEP THE VOLUME AT A LEVEL WHERE YOU CAN STILL
HEAR OUTSIDE NOISES WHILE DRIVING.
Excessive volume levels that obscure sounds such as emergency
vehicle sirens or road warning signals (train crossings, etc.) can be
dangerous and may result in an accident. LISTENING AT LOUD
VOLUME LEVELS IN A CAR MAY ALSO CAUSE HEARING
DAMAGE.
WARNING
Points to Observe for Safe Usage
•
Read this manual carefully before using this disc and system
components. They contain instructions on how to use this product in a
safe and effective manner. Alpine cannot be responsible for problems
resulting from failure to observe the instructions in this manual.
This manual uses various pictorial displays to show you how to use this
product safely and to alert you to potential dangers resulting from
improper connections and operation. Following are the meanings of these
pictorial displays. It is important to fully understand the meanings of these
pictorial displays in order to use this manual and the system properly.
MINIMIZE DISPLAY VIEWING WHILE DRIVING.
Viewing the display may distract the driver from looking ahead of
the vehicle and cause an accident.
•
DO NOT DISASSEMBLE OR ALTER.
Doing so may result in an accident, fire or electric shock.
USE ONLY IN CARS WITH A 12 VOLT NEGATIVE GROUND.
(Check with your dealer if you are not sure.) Failure to do so may
result in fire, etc.
WARNING
•
•
Operation of the system while driving is dangerous. Users
should stop vehicle before operating the software.
Road conditions and regulations take precedence over
information contained on the map display: observe actual
traffic restrictions and circumstances while driving.
This software is designed for use exclusively in the INA-W910.
It cannot and may not be used in conjunction with other
hardware.
KEEP SMALL OBJECTS SUCH AS BATTERIES OUT OF THE
REACH OF CHILDREN.
Swallowing them may result in serious injury. If swallowed,
consult a physician immediately.
•
USE THE CORRECT AMPERE RATING WHEN REPLACING FUSES.
Failure to do so may result in fire or electric shock.
WARNING
This symbol means important instructions.
Failure to heed them can result in serious injury
or death.
DO NOT BLOCK VENTS OR RADIATOR PANELS.
Doing so may cause heat to build up inside and may result in fire.
USE THIS PRODUCT FOR MOBILE 12V APPLICATIONS.
Use for other than its designed application may result in fire,
electric shock or other injury.
INSTALL THE PRODUCT CORRECTLY SO THAT THE DRIVER
CANNOT WATCH TV/VIDEO UNLESS THE VEHICLE IS
STOPPED AND THE EMERGENCY BRAKE IS APPLIED.
It is dangerous (and illegal in many states) for the driver to watch
TV/Video while driving a vehicle. Installing this product incorrectly
enables the driver to watch TV/Video while driving. This may cause
a distraction, preventing the driver from looking ahead, thus causing
an accident. The driver or other people could be severely injured.
DO NOT PLACE HANDS, FINGERS OR FOREIGN OBJECTS IN
INSERTION SLOTS OR GAPS.
Doing so may result in personal injury or damage to the product.
CAUTION
This symbol means important instructions.
Failure to heed them can result in injury or
material property damage.
DO NOT WATCH VIDEO WHILE DRIVING.
Watching the video may distract the driver from looking ahead of
the vehicle and cause an accident.
DO NOT OPERATE ANY FUNCTION THAT TAKES YOUR
HALT USE IMMEDIATELY IF A PROBLEM APPEARS.
Failure to do so may cause personal injury or damage to the
product. Return it to your authorized Alpine dealer or the nearest
Alpine Service Center for repairing.
ATTENTION AWAY FROM SAFELY DRIVING YOUR VEHICLE.
Any function that requires your prolonged attention should only be
performed after coming to a complete stop. Always stop the vehicle
in a safe location before performing these functions. Failure to do
so may result in an accident.
KEEP FINGERS AWAY WHILE THE MOTORIZED FRONT
PANEL OR MOVING MONITOR IS IN MOTION.
DO NOT FOLLOW ROUTE SUGGESTIONS IF THE
NAVIGATION SYSTEM INSTRUCTS YOU TO PERFORM AN
UNSAFE OR ILLEGAL MANEUVER, OR PLACES YOU IN AN
UNSAFE SITUATION OR AREA.
Failure to do so may result in personal injury or damage to the product.
This product is not a substitute for your personal judgment. Any
route suggestions by this system should never supersede any local
traffic regulations or your personal judgment or knowledge of safe
driving practice.
11-EN
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
New Discs
PRECAUTIONS
To prevent the disc from jamming, “Disc Error” is displayed if
discs with irregular surfaces are inserted or if discs are inserted
incorrectly. When a new disc is ejected immediately after initial
loading, use your finger to feel around the inside of the center hole
and outside edge of the disc. If you feel any small bumps or
irregularities, this could inhibit proper loading of the disc. To
remove the bumps, rub the inside edge of the hole and outside edge
of the disc with a ballpoint pen or other such instrument, then insert
the disc again.
Product Cleaning
Use a soft dry cloth for periodic cleaning of the product. For more
severe stains, please dampen the cloth with water only. Anything
else has the chance of dissolving the paint or damaging the plastic.
Temperature
Be sure the temperature inside the vehicle is between +45 °C
(+113 °F) and 0 °C (+32 °F) before turning your unit on.
Center Hole
Center Hole
New Disc
Moisture Condensation
You may notice the disc playback sound wavering due to
condensation. If this happens, remove the disc from the player and
wait about an hour for the moisture to evaporate.
Outside
Bumps
(Bumps)
Installation Location
Make sure the INA-W910 will not be installed in a location
subjected to:
Damaged Disc
Do not attempt to play cracked, warped, or damaged discs. Playing
a bad disc could severely damage the playback mechanism.
•
•
•
•
Direct sun and heat
High humidity and water
Excessive dust
Maintenance
If you have problems, do not attempt to repair the unit yourself.
Return it to your Alpine dealer or the nearest Alpine Service
Station for servicing.
Excessive vibrations
Correct Handling
Never Attempt the Following
Do not drop the disc while handling. Hold the disc so you will not
leave fingerprints on the surface. Do not affix tape, paper, or
gummed labels to the disc. Do not write on the disc.
Do not grip or pull out the disc while it is being pulled back into the
player by the automatic reloading mechanism.
Do not attempt to insert a disc into the unit when the unit power is
off.
CORRECT
INCORRECT
CORRECT
Inserting Discs
Your player accepts only one disc at a time for playback. Do not
attempt to load more than one disc.
Make sure the label side is facing up when you insert the disc.
“Disc Error” will be displayed on your player if you insert a disc
incorrectly. If “Disc Error” continues to be displayed even though
the disc has been inserted correctly, push the RESET switch with a
pointed object such as a ballpoint pen.
Disc Cleaning
Fingerprints, dust, or soil on the surface of the disc could cause the
DVD player to skip. For routine cleaning, wipe the playing surface
with a clean, soft cloth from the center of the disc to the outer edge.
If the surface is heavily soiled, dampen a clean, soft cloth in a
solution of mild neutral detergent before cleaning the disc.
Playing a disc while driving on a very bumpy road may result in
skips, but this will not scratch the disc or damage the player.
Irregular Shaped Discs
Be sure to use round shaped discs only for this unit and never use
any special shaped discs.
Use of special shaped discs may cause damage to the mechanism.
12-EN
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Discs Playable on This Unit
Disc Accessories
There are various accessories available on the market for protecting
the disc surface and improving sound quality. However, most of
them will influence the thickness and/or diameter of the disc. Using
such accessories can cause operational problems. We recommend
not using these accessories on discs played in Alpine DVD players.
Playable Discs
The discs listed below can be played on this unit.
Mark (logo)
Recorded content
Disc size
12 cm*
8 cm
Audio
+
Video
DVD Video
DVD Audio
Transparent Sheet
Disc Stabilizer
12 cm*
8 cm
Audio
+
Video
•
•
After turning the system off, a slight ghost of the image will
remain temporarily. This is an effect peculiar to LCD technology
and is normal.
In cold temperature conditions, the screen may lose contrast
temporarily. After a short warm-up period, it will return to
normal.
12 cm
Audio
+
Video CD
Video
Alpine products equipped with the Ai-NET bus, connected to the
INA-W910, can be operated from the INA-W910. Depending on
the products connected, the functions and displays will vary. For
details, consult your Alpine dealer.
8 cm
12 cm
Operation of some of the functions of this unit is very complex.
Because of this, it was deemed necessary to place these functions
into a special screen. This will restrict operation of these functions
to times when the vehicle is parked. This ensures the focus of the
driver’s attention will be on the road and not on the INA-W910.
This has been done for the safety of the driver and passengers.
Audio Processor Adjustments cannot be made if the car is moving.
The car must be parked and the parking brake must be engaged for
the procedure described in the Owner’s Manual to be valid. The
warning “Can’t Operate While Driving” will be displayed if any
attempts are made to perform these operations while driving.
Music CD
Audio
8 cm
(CD single)
* Two-layer DVD disc compatible
The formatted discs listed below can be played on this unit.
CD-R/
CD-RW
DVD-R/
DVD-RW
DVD+R/
DVD+RW
•
The INA-W910 draws minimal current even when its power switch is
turned off. If the switched power (ignition) lead of the INA-W910 is
connected directly to the positive (+) post of the vehicle’s battery, the
battery may be discharged.
CD Format
An SPST (Single-Pole, Single-Throw) switch (sold separately) can be
added to simplify this procedure. Then, you can simply place it in the
OFF position when you leave the vehicle. Turn the SPST switch back
ON before using the INA-W910. For connecting the SPST switch,
(page 123). If the power (ignition) lead is unswitched, it must be
disconnected from the battery post should the vehicle be left unused
for an extended period of time.
MP3 Format
(“mp3”)
WMA Format
(“wma”)
AAC Format
(“aac”, “m4a”)
DVD Video Format
Video CD Format
Discs that are not finalized cannot be played back.
13-EN
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Discs that cannot be played
Tips for making your own discs
DVD-ROMs, DVD-RAMs, CD-ROMs (excluding MP3/WMA/
The INA-W910 plays DVD Video, DVD Audio, Video CD, Audio
AAC files), photo CDs, etc.
CD and has a built in MP3/WMA/AAC decoder.
The following information is designed to help you create your own
music CDs (either Audio CD or MP3/WMA/AAC encoded
CD-R/RW files).
DualDisc
This unit is not compatible with DualDisc.
Using a DualDisc may cause unit malfunction, and may cause disc
damage when the disc is inserted/ejected.
What is the difference between an Audio and MP3/WMA/AAC
CD?
An Audio CD is the same format as the commercial CDs you buy
in the store (also known as CD-DA). MP3 (MPEG-1 Audio Layer
3)/WMA (Windows Media Audio)/AAC (Advanced Audio
Coding) is a data file that uses a compression scheme to reduce the
size of the music file*.
DVD region number (playable region number)
This DVD player will play back any disc whose region number is 1
(or All). DVDs with a region number other than those listed below,
cannot be played on this DVD player.
Hybrid Audio CD and Data (MP3/WMA/AAC) CD-R/RW
discs:
The INA-W910 can read either sector on the disc. Choose CD-DA
to play the CD audio section or MP3/WMA/AAC to play the MP3/
WMA/AAC section*.
1
ALL
Using compact discs (CD/CD-R/CD-RW)
If you use unspecified compact discs, correct performance cannot
be guaranteed.
Multisession CD-R/RW:
Once a recording has been stopped, this is considered one session.
If the disc is not closed (finalized), additional data may be added.
Once this additional data has been recorded, this becomes a
“multisession” CD. The INA-W910 can only read multisession
DATA Formatted discs (MP3/WMA/AAC files - Not Audio CD
files).
You can play CD-Rs (CD-Recordables)/CD-RWs (CD-
ReWritables) which have been recorded only on audio devices. You
can also play CD-Rs/CD-RWs containing MP3/WMA/AAC
formatted audio files.
•
Some of the following discs may not play on this unit:
Flawed discs, discs with fingerprints, discs exposed to extreme
temperatures or sunlight (e.g., left in the car or this unit), discs
recorded under unstable conditions, discs on which a recording
failed or a re-recording was attempted, copy-protected CDs
which do not conform to the audio CD industry standard.
Use discs with MP3/WMA/AAC files written in a format
Properly formatted MP3/WMA/AAC Discs:
Use ISO9660 formatting to insure proper playback. You may use
standard ISO naming Level 1 (8.3 DOS standard), Level 2 (32
characters) or Joliet (Windows or Macintosh long filenames) file
naming conventions*.
•
* Please consult the Owner’s manual for additional information.
To customers using CD-R/CD-RW
On handling compact discs (CD/CD-R/CD-RW)
•
If a CD-R/CD-RW cannot be played back, make sure the last
recording session was closed (finalized).
Finalize the CD-R/CD-RW if necessary, and attempt playback
again.
•
•
•
•
•
•
Do not touch the surface.
Do not expose the disc to direct sunlight.
Do not affix stickers or labels.
Clean the disc when it is dusty.
Make sure that the disc is smooth and flat.
Do not use commercially available disc accessories.
•
Do not leave the disc in the car or the unit for a long time.
Never expose the disc to direct sunlight.
Heat and humidity may damage the disc and you may not be
able to play it again.
14-EN
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Using DVD-Rs/DVD-RWs/DVD+Rs/DVD+RWs
•
This unit is compatible with discs recorded in the standard
DVD-Video format.
CAUTION
Alpine accepts no responsibility for lost data, etc., even if data, etc. is
lost while using this product.
•
Note that discs not finalized (processed to enable to play on
playback-only DVD players) cannot be played on this DVD
player.
Some discs may not play back, depending on the recording
device and disc format.
Discs or files utilizing copy protection, may not be playable.
Some recording systems may not properly format copied files to
enable proper playback.
In the following cases, the disc may not play on this unit:
discs recorded by certain DVD recorders, certain irregular discs,
flawed discs, dirty discs, when the pickup lens of this DVD
player is dirty, or when moisture condensation has occurred
inside the unit.
Be sure to follow all cautions included with your DVD-Rs/
DVD-RWs/DVD+Rs/DVD+RWs discs.
Do not put stickers, seals, or tape on the label side of DVD-Rs/
DVD-RWs/DVD+Rs/DVD+RWs.
Compared to the regular discs, DVD-Rs/DVD-RWs/DVD+Rs/
DVD+RWs are more affected by heat, moisture, and direct
sunlight. If left in a car, etc. damage may occur and it might not
play on this unit.
The operable temperature range for disc playback is as follows:
DVD-R/DVD-RW: -25 ~ +70 °C
On Handling Flash Memory
•
•
•
This unit can control a memory storage device that supports the
USB Mass Storage Class (MSC) protocol. Playable audio file
formats are MP3, WMA and AAC.
Flash memory function is not guaranteed. Use Flash memory
according to the terms of agreement. Read the Flash memory
Owner’s Manual thoroughly.
Fix the Flash memory in a location where driver operation will
not be hindered.
Flash memory may not function correctly at high or low
temperature.
Use only certified Flash memory. Note that even certified Flash
memory, may not function correctly depending on its type or
state.
Depending on the settings of the Flash memory type, memory
state or encoding software, the unit may not play back or display
properly.
Files protected by DRM (Digital Rights Management), cannot be
played back on this unit. These include AAC formatted files
purchased from the iTunes Store and WMA or other files with
some form of copyright protection.
Flash memory may take time to start playback. If there is a
particular file other than audio in the Flash memory, it may take
considerable time before the file is played back or searched.
The unit can play back “mp3”, “wma” or “m4a” file extensions.
Do not add the above extensions to a file other than audio data.
This non-audio data will not be recognized. The resulting
playback may contain noise that can damage speakers and/or
amplifiers.
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
DVD+R/DVD+RW: +5 ~ +55 °C
•
Disc terminology
Title
•
•
If titles are programed for the DVD, these are the largest units of
division of the information recorded on the disc.
Chapter
Each Title may also be divided into smaller divisions, called
chapters. These can be specific scenes or musical selections.
•
•
It is recommended to back up important data on a personal
computer.
Do not remove the USB device while playback is in progress.
Change SOURCE to something other than USB, then remove the
USB device to prevent possible damage to its memory.
Protecting the USB connector
•
Only an iPod/iPhone, Flash memory or Portable audio player
can be connected to the USB connector on this unit. Correct
performance using other USB products cannot be guaranteed.
If the USB connector is used, be sure to use only the supplied
connector cable with the unit. A USB hub is not supported.
Depending on the connected Flash memory device, the unit may
not function or some functions may not be performed.
The audio file format that can be played back on the unit is MP3/
WMA/AAC.
•
•
•
•
Artist/song name, etc. can be displayed. Certain, special
characters may not be correctly displayed.
15-EN
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
•
This product incorporates copyright protection technology that
is protected by U.S. patents and other intellectual property
rights. Use of this copyright protection technology must be
authorized by Macrovision, and is intended for home and other
limited viewing uses only unless otherwise authorized by
Macrovision. Reverse engineering or disassembly is prohibited.
Manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories. Dolby
and the double-D symbol are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories.
Manufactured under license under U.S. Patent #’s: 5,451,942;
5,956,674; 5,974,380; 5,978,762; 6,487,535 & other U.S. and
worldwide patents issued & pending. DTS and the Symbol are
registered trademarks, & DTS 2.0+ Digital Out and the DTS
logos are trademarks of DTS, Inc. Product includes software.
© DTS, Inc. All Rights Reserved.
Windows Media, and the Windows logo are trademarks, or
registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United
States and/or other countries.
iPhone, iPod, iPod classic, iPod nano, iPod touch, and iTunes
are trademarks of Apple Inc., registered in the U.S. and other
countries.
“Made for iPod,” and “Made for iPhone,” mean that an
electronic accessory has been designed to connect specifically to
iPod, or iPhone, respectively, and has been certified by the
developer to meet Apple performance standards. Apple is not
responsible for the operation of this device or its compliance
with safety and regulatory standards.
Pandora and the Pandora logo are registered trademarks of
Pandora Media, Inc. All rights reserved. Due to music licensing
restrictions, the Pandora radio service is only available in the
United States. This device will control Pandora when connected
to a compatible iPhone.
On Handling Portable audio player
•
The unit can control a Portable audio player with the USB
interface. Playable audio file formats are MP3 and WMA.
Portable audio player function is not guaranteed. Use Portable
audio player according to the terms of agreement. Read the
Portable audio player Owner’s Manual thoroughly.
Avoid usage or storage in the following locations:
Anywhere in the car exposed to direct sunlight or high
temperatures.
•
•
•
•
Anywhere the possibility of high humidity or corrosive
substances are present.
•
•
•
Fix the Portable audio player in a location where driver operation
will not be hindered.
Portable audio player may not function correctly at high or low
temperature.
Depending on the settings of the Portable audio player type,
memory state or encoding software, the unit may not play back
or display properly.
•
•
•
•
•
•
If the Portable audio player has an MSC/MTP setting, set to
MTP.
A Portable audio player in which data is stored by USB Mass
Storage may not be playable on the unit.
Depending on the Portable audio player settings, USB Mass
Storage may be supported. For setting, refer to the Owner’s
Manual of the player.
•
•
The unit can play back MP3/WMA files synchronized by
Windows Media Player (Ver. 10 or 11), and are then forwarded
to the player. The “mp3” or “wma” extensions are playable.
If data is not synchronized by Windows Media Player and is
forwarded in another way, the unit may not be able to correctly
play back the files.
•
•
•
HD Radio Technology manufactured under license from iBiquity
Digital Corporation. U.S. and Foreign Patents. HD Radio™ and
the HD, HD Radio, and “Arc” logos are proprietary trademarks
of iBiquity Digital Corp.
•
•
WMDRM10 is supported by the unit.
A file that is copy-protected (copyright protection) cannot be
played back.
It is recommended to back up important data on a personal
computer.
Do not remove the USB device while playback is in progress.
Change SOURCE to something other than USB, then remove the
USB device to prevent possible damage to its memory.
•
•
®
The BLUETOOTH word mark and logos are registered
trademarks owned by the Bluetooth SIG, Inc. and any use of
such marks by Alpine Electronics, Inc. is under license.
SiriusXM and all related marks and logos are trademarks of
Sirius XM Radio, Inc. All rights reserved.
“MPEG Layer-3 audio coding technology licensed from
Fraunhofer IIS and Thomson.”
•
•
•
•
On Handling SD memory card
•
The SD memory card reader of the unit can only be used during
the navigation system update, and it does not support the audio
and video file playback.
During the navigation system update, please use the SD memory
card that only contains the data for update. Otherwise, the
display may be abnormal. In this case, please consult your
ALPINE dealer. For the operation on update, refer to ALPINE
website.
Audyssey MultEQ XT is a registered trademark of Audyssey
Laboratories Inc.
“Supply of this product only conveys a license for private, non-
commercial use and does not convey a license nor imply any
right to use this product in any commercial (i.e. revenue-
generation) real time broadcasting (terrestrial, satellite, cable
and/or any other media), broadcasting/streaming via internet,
intranets and/or other networks or in other electronic content
distribution systems, such as pay-audio or audio-on-demand
applications. An independent license for such use is required.
For details, please visit http://www.mp3licensing.com”
•
©2010 NAVTEQ. All rights reserved.
Portions ©2010, Microsoft Corporation. All Rights Reserved.
16-EN
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
AUDIO
button
Return to the AV main source screen that is displayed
before the Setup, Navigation, Telephone, Camera mode,
etc. is started.
current screen is audio source screen (HD Radio, CD, iPod,
etc.). Press again to turn it off.
Getting Started
Accessory List
MAP button
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Head unit .............................................................................1
Power cable.........................................................................1
Microphone..........................................................................1
Remote control ....................................................................1
Battery (CR2025).................................................................1
Mounting sleeve ..................................................................1
Bracket key..........................................................................2
Flush Head Screw (M5x8) ...................................................6
Screw (M5×8)......................................................................8
Face plate............................................................................1
Mounting Position Seal ........................................................2
GPS Antenna .......................................................................1
Pre OUT Cable ....................................................................1
AUX I/O Cable .....................................................................1
AV extension cable..............................................................1
USB extension cable ...........................................................1
USB 30P cable ....................................................................1
Owner’s Manual.............................................................1 set
Recall the navigation map screen.
Press and hold for at least 2 seconds to recall the saved
Jump Source channel. (When an optional SiriusXM Tuner is
connected.)
NAVI MENU button
Recall the navigation menu screen.
RESET switch
Be sure to press the RESET switch when using the unit for
the first time, after installing the CD changer, after changing
the car battery, etc.
Turn off the unit power, press RESET with a ballpoint pen or
similar pointed object.
Remote Sensor
Point the remote control transmitter towards the remote
sensor within a range of 2 meters.
About the button descriptions used in this Owner’s Manual
•
The buttons found on the face of the unit are expressed in bold
(e.g. SOURCE/ ). The buttons found on the touch-screen
display are shown in bold within brackets, [ ] (e.g. [Exit]).
This Owner’s Manual explains mainly the function of soft
buttons, when a soft button and a unit button have the same
function.
•
Turning Power On or Off
Some of this unit’s functions cannot be performed while the vehicle is in
motion. Be sure to stop your vehicle in a safe location and apply the
parking brake, before attempting these operations.
Optional Remote Control Interface Box
This unit is operable using the vehicle’s secondary radio controls.
An Alpine Remote Control Interface Box (optional) is required. For
details, contact your Alpine dealer.
1
•
Press SOURCE/ to turn on the unit.
The unit can be turned on by pressing any button.
2
Press and hold SOURCE/ for at least 3 seconds to
turn off the unit.
Location of Controls
button
Recalls the Eject/Tilt screen.
If the disc does not eject after touching [Eject] of Disc, press
and hold
for at least 3 seconds.
/
button
Press to adjust the volume.
MUTE/PHONE button
Lowers the volume by 20 dB instantly. Press the button
again to cancel.
Press and hold for at least 2 seconds to display the
Telephone Menu screen.
SOURCE/ button
Turns the power on. Press and hold for at least 3 seconds to
turn the power off.
Recalls the SOURCE selection screen.
17-EN
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Insert the SD memory card
Insert your SD memory card until it clicks.
Inserting/Ejecting a Disc
2
1
2
Press
on the unit.
The display changes to the Eject/Tilt screen.
Insert a disc:
Touch [Open] on the Eject/Tilt screen.
The movable monitor will open, then insert a disc into the
disc slot. Inserting a disc will close the monitor
automatically.
Remove the SD memory card
2
Push the SD memory card that is inserted.
The SD memory card is pulled out.
Disc Slot
3
4
Close the cover of SD memory card slot.
Close the movable monitor.
Eject the disc:
Adjusting the Monitor Viewing Angle
Touch [Eject] of Disc on the Eject/Tilt screen.
The movable monitor will open. Then the disc is ejected.
After remove the disc, touch [Close] to close the movable
monitor.
Adjust the monitor’s angle for better visibility.
1
2
Press
on the unit.
The display changes to the Eject/Tilt screen.
•
•
Touching [Exit] returns to the earlier main source screen.
Do not apply shock to the movable monitor when it is open as it may
result in malfunction of the unit.
The monitor may be dim during low temperature and immediately
after turning on the power. The brightness will return to normal as
time elapses.
Touch [ ] or [ ] of Tilt to adjust the desired
monitor angle.
•
•
The monitor angle can be adjusted in 5 stages.
The monitor will stop at the set tilt angle when closing.
3
•
Touch [Exit] to return to the previous screen.
If the monitor touches an obstacle while the angle is being adjusted,
it will stop immediately.
CAUTION
Keep hands (or any other object) away from the monitor while it
is opening or closing to avoid damage or injury. The back of the
movable monitor will get very warm under normal operating
conditions. This is not a malfunction. Do not touch.
•
•
The screen color will vary when viewed at certain angles. Adjust the
screen angle for the best viewing position.
If the voltage of the vehicle’s battery power is low, the screen may
blink when the screen angle is changed. This is normal and not a
malfunction.
Inserting/Removing the SD Memory Card
(Only for Updating the Navigation System)
Adjusting the Volume
Adjust the volume by pressing
or
.
Volume decreases/increases continuously by pressing and
holding or
Volume: 0 - 35
You can update the software and map of navigation system by using an
optional SD memory card. To insert and take out the SD memory card,
follow the instructions below.
.
1
After opening the movable monitor, open the cover
of SD memory card slot.
Lowering Volume Quickly
Activating the Audio Mute function will instantly lower the volume
level by 20 dB.
Press MUTE to activate the MUTE mode.
The audio level will decrease by about 20 dB.
Pressing MUTE again will bring the audio back to its
previous level.
18-EN
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Display example for HD Radio main screen
How to view the Display
Soft button operation
•
•
Be sure to touch the button lightly with the pad of your finger on the
display to protect the display.
If you touch a button and there is no reaction, remove your finger
from the display, and try again.
About the button descriptions used in this Owner’s Manual
•
Soft buttons, ones found in the display, are shown in bold
enclosed in brackets, [ ] (e.g. [Exit]).
•
When a soft button and a head unit button have the same
function, the explanations in this Owner’s Manual will describe
the function of the soft button.
Displays the source name, such as HD Radio band,
etc., that is selected.
Changes to the Bass* , Treble* and Subwoofer* Level
Recalling the Source
1
1
2
adjustment screen directly.
Here is an example explanation for the HD Radio mode display on how
to recall a source.
•
•
If the optional IMPRINT audio processor is connected, the Bass and
Treble Level can be adjusted only when MultEQ is set to Curve 1 or
If an optional external audio processor is connected, when touch this
button, the display will change to Balance/Fader, Subwoofer Level
and Defeat setting screen directly.
1
Press SOURCE/ on the unit.
The SOURCE selection screen is displayed.
Display example for SOURCE selection screen
Displays the time.
Function Guide:
The function guide display varies depending on each
source.
The contents of the function guide change by touching
3
3
3
[P1/2]* , [P1/3]* or [P1/4]* on the function guide, and
many other operations can be performed.
4
Displays the icon of current source or artwork image* .
If the GUIDEVIEW WINDOW™ mode is activated, the
information of Navigation system will be displayed in this
area.
*1
*2
Adjustment cannot be performed when DEFEAT is set to ON.
Adjustment cannot be performed when SUBWOOFER is set to OFF
Display may vary depending on the connected devices.
If the playing song contains artwork data, the artwork image can be
displayed (only for USB Audio, Pandora and iPod mode).
*3
*4
Changes the items of source selection list.
Changes to the Telephone Menu screen.
Displays the view video of camera.
(When an optional camera is connected and Camera IN
is set to Direct or RCA.)
Changes to main source screen.
Displays the source selection list.
(The kind of source modes that are displayed varies
depending on connection and setting).
Changes to Setup Select screen.
2
Touch [HD Radio].
The screen changes to the HD Radio mode main display.
•
If your desired source is not displayed on the screen, touch [ ] to
change the items of the source selection list first. Then touch the
desired source key.
19-EN
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Displaying the Numeric Keypad Input
Screen
Navigation
The numeric keypad input screen is displayed when the DVD mode is
selected for searching a title or chapter. It can also be used for entering a
country code or password for DVD setup, and for selecting a channel
number in the SiriusXM Radio mode etc.
Basic Operation
The INA-W910 GPS Navigation Receiver provides an easy-to-use user
interface, clear, easy-to-understand spoken driving instructions, and
award winning design.
INA-W910 is built upon Alpine’s history of navigation success in North
America. Please read this manual carefully. If you have any further
questions about INA-W910’s operation, feel free to call Alpine at
1-888-NAV-HELP (1-888-628-4357) for technical assistance.
1
2
Touch [10KEY] on the selected source screen.
Touch the desired numeric key.
Display example for numeric keypad
Turning the Navigation System On
With this system, every time when the ignition key is turned to the ACC
or ON positions and navigation mode is activated, the opening screen
will be displayed automatically.
1
2
Press MAP or NAVI MENU on the unit to activate
the navigation system.
Every time you boot up the system, both the
language selection menu and IMPORTANT! are
displayed on the screen. Touch the desired
language.
Input screen area
Closes numeric keypad input screen
All input numbers will be deleted.
Previous number will be deleted.
Input number is confirmed.
Numeric keypad
The numeric keypad input screen closes when the area
is touched while displayed.
3
Touch [Enter] to confirm your entry.
After the language has been selected, important
information is displayed in each language.
Be sure to read the important information.
3
After you have read this important information,
touch [I Accept].
The map or Navigation Main Menu screen is displayed.
20-EN
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
GPS Status Bar
GPS Signal Strength
Map Functions
Current Position
Switch Guidance Map
•
You can choose between full map and arrow only in
guidance mode.
Switch Arrow Only
Displays three successive arrow maneuvers
all the way to your destination while
providing turn-by-turn guidance prompts.
Switch Full Map
Shows a full-screen map of the area while
providing turn-by-turn guidance prompts.
•
When not in the guidance mode, only the current position
can be seen. Zoom buttons, Map Orientation button and
Main Menu are available.
Zoom Out Button
Touch this icon to zoom out.
Next Maneuver Arrow and Voice Prompt Button
Repeating the Announcement
Touch this icon to repeat the guide
announcement.
(Same as Next Maneuver Arrow)
Zoom In Button
Touch this icon to zoom in.
Route Button
Touch this icon and it will take you to the
route menu.
Estimate Time Display
Main Menu Button
Next Street Name
This icon displays Estimated Time
Remaining, Estimated Time of Arrival or
Direction to Destination.
Highway Exit Button
When the vehicle is on a Highway, the screen is displayed.
Highway exit information is displayed as a list in order of
close proximity to current position.
You can also set a waypoint, etc. by touching the desired
Highway Exit.
•
The time estimates are based on the average speed. The
estimate time will vary depending on vehicle speed. The
arrow always points toward the destination.
Map Orientation
Touch this icon to switch between North Up, Heading Up
and 3D View.
North Up
In north up view, north is always at the top of the
display. This makes it easy to determine your
current heading with respect to the map.
Heading Up
In heading-up view, the current direction is
always pointing to the top of the display. This
makes it easy to see the direction of the next turn
on the map.
Traffic Button
When traffic data is available (in selected markets), the
traffic button is displayed.
Traffic incidents (accident, etc.) will be displayed in a list
format in order of proximity to current position.
3D View
The 3D View offers you a more realistic
perspective by tilting the map and displaying it
with a horizon line. Streets are displayed as you
approach them instead of from a birds-eye view.
22-EN
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Finding Local Places
From the Map Display
1
2
Touch anywhere on map screen.
Setting a Destination
The vehicle arrow changes to a crosshair cursor.
1
2
Touch anywhere on map screen.
Touch the selected position bar on the bottom of the
screen.
The vehicle arrow changes to a crosshair cursor.
3
4
Select Find Nearby Places.
Select the desired category and the desired place.
Position bar
3
Move the cursor to the new desired street.
•
Use Map Zoom button to zoom out the map if the destination is far
from the current location.
5
Touch [Go!] on the Confirm Destination Screen.
4
5
Touch the selected position bar on the bottom of the
screen.
•
To use destination options on the Confirm Destination Screen, see
finding places though Places menu.
Select Set as Destination.
Setting Waypoints
1
2
3
4
Touch anywhere on map screen.
The vehicle arrow changes to a crosshair cursor.
Move the cursor to the desired waypoint.
Touch the selected position bar on the bottom of the
screen.
6
Touch [Go!] on the Confirm Destination Screen.
•
To use destination options on the Confirm Destination Screen, see
.
5
Select Set as Waypoint and the destination will
automatically be added to the Waypoint List.
6
Touch [Go!].
•
23-EN
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Places Button
Input a Destination
Go to Menu
Go to Main Menu
Go to
Returns to the previous screen.
Page List Down
Map Button
Address Book Button
Intersection Button
Address Button
•
Last 4 Streets/Last 4 Cities:
The last four street names and city names searched are
stored in memory.
•
Last 4 Streets/Last 4 Cities:
The last four street names and city names searched are
stored in memory.
You can reselect a street name/city name from this list.
You can reselect a street name/city name from this list.
Coordinates Button
Set destination using geographic coordinates. See
History Button
Page List Up
24-EN
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5
6
Type the desired city.
Set a Destination by Address
If there are multiple matches, the system lists cities
containing the street name and address number that you
keyed in.
There are several ways to set a destination. You can set a destination
Go to Main Menu
Go to
Address
The Confirm Destination Screen appears. Touch
[Go!] to calculate the route.
Finding a Destination by Entering Street Name First
1
2
Select by Street.
7
on the confirmation destination screen.
Type the street name and touch [OK].
Finding a Destination by City Name First
1
2
Select by City.
Type the city name and touch [OK].
If there are multiple matches, the system automatically
displays a short list of street names.
Type only the name of the street. Prefix and suffix of the
street are not necessary.
The list of applicable street names appears.
If there are multiple matches, the system automatically
displays a short list of city names. Select the desired city.
3
4
Select the desired street name from the list.
3
4
Type the characters of the street name and touch
[OK].
The list of applicable street names appears. Select
the desired street.
5
6
Type the address number and touch [OK].
Type the address number and touch [OK].
The Confirm Destination Screen appears. Touch
[Go!] to calculate the route.
25-EN
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3
4
Use the arrow to the right of the list to scroll up and
down the list.
Set a Destination by Place
You can select from approximately 6 million place locations stored
inside your INA-W910 GPS Navigation System.
Select the desired place.
For emergency locations such as Police Stations, Hospitals,
etc., please verify availability before proceeding to such
locations.
Go to Main Menu
Go to
Places
5
The Confirm Destination Screen appears. Touch
[Go!] to calculate a route.
By Type
1
2
Select by Type.
Finding a Place From Here or Near Your Destination
Select a desired type.
•
•
Last 4 names and Last 4 types takes you to a list from the last 4
places/types you have previously entered.
If you find a place near your destination:
When you arrive at a destination, a destination name (POI search),
address and telephone number are displayed in the display bar.
If you want to display a trip summary, touching the arrow in the
display bar, and [Summary] will display a detailed trip summary.
Display bar
3
4
There are 37 Place categories to choose from
including ATMs, Banks, Gas Stations, Grocery
Stores, Hotels, Parking Lots, Restaurants and more.
Follow steps 3 through 5 of the instructions above.
By Name
Finding a Place from City Center
1
Select by Name.
1
2
Select From City Center.
Select by City.
2
Type the desired place name. Touch [OK].
•
Last 4 Cities takes you straight to the list of cities you have
previously entered.
3
4
5
Type a city name and select a city.
You can choose by Name or by Type.
A list of place names appears.
Follow steps from “by Name” or “by Type” on
26-EN
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Finding a Place along Your Route
Set a Destination from the Address Book
Go to Main Menu
Go to
Address Book
1
2
Select Along Route.
1
Select the desired destination.
Select the desired place type button. Touch [OK].
2
The Confirm Destination Screen appears. Touch
[Go!] to calculate the route.
•
Highlighted button means it is selected. You can select multiple place
types. Touch the button again to turn the selection on or off.
Editing Address Book
3
A list of places appears
The lockout function applies to Setup Menu and Edit Address Book.
To edit address book, your vehicle must be parked with the ignition key
in the ACC or ON position. To do this, follow the procedures below.
Select the desired place.
4
Touch [Go!].
1 Bring your vehicle to a complete stop at a safe location.
Engage the parking brake.
2 Keep pushing the foot brake and release the parking
brake once then engage it again.
Set a Destination by History
3 When the parking brake is engaged for the second time,
release the foot brake.
Go to Main Menu
Go to
History
•
For automatic transmission vehicles, place the transmission lever in
the Park position.
1
The list of recent destinations appears. Select the
destination.
Go to Main Menu
Go to
Select the destination you would like to modify.
Touch to edit your entry.
Address Book
1
2
3
Edit Name, Phone Number and Icon or delete the
selected destination.
2
The Confirm Destination Screen appears. Touch
[Go!] to calculate the route.
•
To use destination options on the Confirm Destination Screen, see
Deleting All History
Go to Main Menu
•
Select Delete All to delete all addresses saved in the address book.
History
1
2
Touch [Clear All].
Touch [Clear All] to delete all previous
destinations.
27-EN
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3
Input the second street name.
Set a Destination by Coordinates
If there is only one street crossing with the first street, the
name of the street automatically appears.
Go to Main Menu
Go to
Coordinates
1
Enter the Latitude of your destination. Touch [OK].
4
5
Confirm City name if there are more than one city
with the same intersection.
The Confirm Destination Screen appears. Touch
[Go!] to calculate the route.
2
Enter the Longitude of your destination. Touch [OK].
•
To use other functions on the Confirm Destination Screen, see
Finding a Intersection by Entering a City Name First
If you know the city name of the intersection you are searching, select
by City. The choice of the street is narrowed down automatically. This
saves time in entering the street information.
3
The Confirm Destination Screen appears. Touch
[Go!] to calculate the route.
1
2
Select by City.
•
To use destination options on the Confirm Destination Screen, see
Type the city name, then select the city from the list.
Set a Destination by Intersection
Go to Main Menu
Go to
Intersection
Finding a Intersection by Entering a Street Name First
1
2
Select by Street.
Type in the first street name. Touch [OK].
3
4
Input the first street name.
Input the second street name.
5
The Confirm Destination Screen appears. Touch
[Go!] to calculate the route.
•
Last 4 Street and Last 4 Cities takes you to a list of the last 4 entries.
The list of applicable street names appears. Select the
desired street and input the address number.
28-EN
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Finding Alternative Routes to the
Destination
Destination Options
The Destination Options Menu allows you to find places nearby, find
alternative routes to get to your destination, set a destination as your
home, save a destination in the address book, and create waypoints.
To get to the Destination Options Menu, enter your desired destination
Destination Screen.
1
2
Touch [Change Method].
Select a method below.
Select Options.
Minimize Freeway
Avoid Toll Road
Use Time Restricted Road
Avoid Ferry
Finding Nearby Places
3
4
Select Quickest or Shortest.
Touch [OK].
1
Touch [Find Nearby Places].
Setting a Destination as Home
1
2
Touch [Set as Home].
Touch [OK] or type desired name and touch [OK].
2
3
Select a desired place type.
Select a desired place name.
4
Touch [Go!] to calculate the route.
•
3
4
Select desire icon. If there is no desired icon, touch
[No Icon].
Touch [OK].
29-EN
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Adding another Waypoint
Saving a Destination into the Address
Book
1
2
Before you touch [Go!] at the Waypoint List screen,
touch [+ Add Waypoint].
1
Touch [Save to Address Book].
Enter the waypoint with any method just as finding a
2
3
Type in desired name. Touch [OK].
3
4
Touch [Set as Waypoint] to confirm.
Select an icon. If there is no desired icon, touch
[No Icon].
The system returns to the Waypoint List screen.
Touch [Go!] to calculate the new route.
4
Touch [OK].
Setting a Waypoint Directly from the Map
Setting Waypoints
You can set up to 3 waypoints between you current location and your
destination. The final destination must be set before entering any
waypoints.
Optimizing Your Route
1
Touch [Set as Waypoint]. The Waypoint List
appears.
Adding a Waypoint
1
Touch [Set as Waypoint] and the destination is
automatically added to the Waypoint List.
2
3
Touch [Options]. Waypoint options screen appears.
Touch [Optimize Route].
2
Touch [Go!] to calculate the route.
4
The system takes you back to the Waypoint List
screen with optimal route. Touch [Go!] to calculate
the route.
30-EN
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Deleting a Waypoint
4
5
Use the Up and Down buttons to move the waypoint.
1
2
Select the desired waypoint to delete from the list.
Touch [Delete].
Touch [OK] and the system returns to the Waypoint
List screen.
Deleting All Waypoints
1
2
Touch [Options].
Touch [Delete All Waypoints]. Touch [Delete All]
to confirm.
6
Touch [Go!] to calculate the route.
Route
Viewing Turn List During Guidance
You can view a list of street names and upcoming turns and streets.
3
If all waypoints are deleted, will return to the
waypoint list. To get back to the Map screen, touch
[Map] to get back to the map.
Main Menu
or
Info
Route
directly from the Map
Editing Order of Waypoints
1
2
Touch [View Turn List].
1
Main Menu
or
from the Map
Info
Route
Edit Waypoint
Edit Waypoint
Route Button
2
3
At the Waypoint List Screen, select the desired
waypoint to edit.
Touch [Edit Order].
A list of upcoming streets and turns appears on the
screen.
To preview a specific point, select a street name/maneuver
on the list.
31-EN
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Avoiding a Particular Street
Finding a Detour
1
2
Touch [View Turn List].
By Distance
List of upcoming streets and turns appears on the
screen. Select the street name, and touch its check
box.
1
2
On Route screen, touch [Detour].
Choose detour from 1/2 mile, 1 mile, 2 miles or 5
miles.
Check box
The system automatically calculates and displays a
detoured route.
3
1
Touch [Avoid].
Finding an Alternate Route
Editing Waypoints
On Route screen, touch [Change Method].
Canceling Route
From Route screen or Main Menu, touch [Cancel Route]
.
•
After canceling the route, you cannot select Route Menu until the
next destination has been set. To set next the destination, see “Go to
Home
You can go Home from anywhere once the Home Address is set. See
page 29 to set a destination as Home.
Going Home
Go to Main Menu
Home
Touch [Go!] to calculate the route.
2
Touch [OK].
•
You can select and re-calculate an alternate route based on Quickest
Route or Shortest Route and select Avoid Freeway, Toll Road, Time
Restricted Road or Ferry.
32-EN
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Route Guidance
GUIDEVIEW WINDOW™ Function
This function allows you to get the navigation information from the
normal screen of Audio Source promptly.
Turn on the GUIDEVIEW WINDOW™ Mode
Go to any audio source screen, press AUDIO
hardkey to turn on GUIDEVIEW WINDOW™. Press again
to turn it off.
The street name of the next maneuver is displayed in the
top portion of the screen.
GUIDEVIEW WINDOW™ Display
Second immediate maneuver arrow is displayed only for
double maneuvers along the route.
The maneuver arrow is displayed for the upcoming
guidance.
Start-Up
A countdown bar is displayed when approaching the
maneuver.
The distance to the maneuver is displayed at the bottom
of the arrow.
Touching the GUIDEVIEW WINDOW will prompt the
system to announce the next maneuver.
Rerouting
Non Guidance
It will be displayed when the rerouting is calculated.
Settings
When touching the GUIDEVIEW WINDOW, the window
will toggle between displaying heading orientation and
the speed limit of the current street.
The Current street name that the vehicle is matched on
to is displayed.
Settings Menu
The lockout function applies to Setup Menu and Edit Address Book. To
enable setup menu, your vehicle must be parked with the ignition key in
the ACC or ON position. To do this, follow the procedures below.
If no GPS signal, the text “Locating GPS Satellites” will
be displayed.
If your vehicle is off segment, nothing is displayed in the
current street name location.
1 Bring your vehicle to a complete stop at a safe location.
Engage the parking brake.
2 Keep pushing the foot brake and release the parking
brake once then engage it again.
3 When the parking brake is engaged for the second time,
release the foot brake.
•
For automatic transmission vehicles, place the transmission lever in
the Park position.
33-EN
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Go to Main Menu
Navigation Button
Returns to the previous screen.
Page List Down
Display Button
Map Button
Audio Button
Map Button
Clock / Regional Button
Restore Navi Defaults Button
This allows you to delete all stored information and default
back to the original factory settings.
34-EN
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Update Button
Displaying and Editing Icons on the Map
For update operation, refer to ALPINE website.
Place Icons, the Home Icon and Icons used in the Address Book can be
turned on and off from the Display Setup Menu.
•
Please do not shut off power or remove the SD card during the
update.
•
Touch [OK] to complete the setting.
Page List Up
Showing Trail Dots
Traffic Button
The Trail feature allows you to turn on and off trail dots that appear
wherever the vehicle icon traverses. This is especially helpful for off-
road enthusiasts.
Customizing Navigation Tool
Go to Main Menu
Navigation
Customizing Display
Go to Main Menu
Display
•
The Day/Night mode map color will be changed automatically based
on sunrise and sunset time.
Screen Recalibration
Route Method
This allows you to recalibrate the touch screen for better accuracy.
You can change the default routing method.
Customizing Map
You can customize map color, vehicle icon, and place icons on the map.
Guidance Map
You can choose between full map and arrow only in guidance mode.
Go to Main Menu
Map
Route Button
You can choose between 3 different route buttons.
Arrival time & distance to destination.
Remaining time & distance to destination.
Direction of destination.
35-EN
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Show Route Overview
Units
This button allows you to view the full route after the destination has
been calculated and before the guidance begins.
You can set the Units of Measure to read in kilometers or miles.
Clock / DST
Auto Zoom
You can set the Clock to 12 or 24 hour style and set Daylight Savings to
fit your region.
This button, when selected, allows the map to automatically zoom in
when approaching maneuver.
Route Unverified Roads if Possible
This button avoids using roads not verified by the map provider.
Start Demo
You can watch a navigation demonstration with the system’s voice and
screen guidance.
•
Set a destination before using this function.
Time Zone
Setting Audio
You can set the Time Zone to fit your region.
Go to Main Menu
Audio
Traffic Settings
Button Sounds
Go to Main Menu
Traffic
This allows you to turn the soft button sounds of navigation mode ON or
OFF.
Guidance Prompt
This allows you to turn ON or OFF the guidance prompts.
Regional Settings
Go to Main Menu
Clock / Regional
Traffic Avoidance
You can choose between 3 options for traffic avoidance.
Prompt:
You will be asked to use a quicker route when traffic is
detected on route.
Automatic: The system will automatically reroute to avoid traffic.
Off:
You will not be asked and the system will not
automatically reroute to avoid traffic.
Language
You can select a Language from English, French and Spanish.
36-EN
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Viewing Dashboard
Information
Go to Main Menu
Info
Dashboard
The odometer displays the speed and time traveled.
Information Menu
Go to Main Menu
Info
Driving Average
Overall Average
Maximum Speed
Driving Time
Average speed.
Average speed (includes idle time).
Maximum speed reached.
Dashboard Button
Time vehicle has been moving.
Time vehicle has been stopped (not moving).
Idle Time
Total elapsed time (driving time plus idle
time).
Total Time
Viewing GPS Status
GPS Button
This feature allows you to view GPS satellite signal information. You
can view the dynamic location information received from satellite, such
as, signal strength, compass (direction information), latitude/longitude,
approximate altitude.
An explanation of the messages is shown below.
Go to Main Menu
Info
GPS
Route Button
The following messages are displayed while the GPS receiver is
tracking satellites:
Locating GPS Satellites
The INA-W910 searches the sky looking for GPS satellites.
Acquiring GPS Signal
System Button
The INA-W910 acquires positioning information transmitted from
1 to 3 tracked satellites while searching for more satellites
(minimum 4 of needed).
Fixing GPS Position
The INA-W910 requires continuous signals from 4 or more
tracked satellites (for 30 seconds) in order to accurately fix your
position.
37-EN
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Temporary Poor GPS Coverage
Thunderstorms, dense foliage or surrounding tall buildings may
cause temporary loss of position fix (acceptable if under 30
seconds).
HD Radio
Display example for HD Radio main screen
Poor GPS Signal, Lost Position Fix
You may have entered an area where consistently poor GPS
signal (lasting 30 seconds or more) makes it impossible to
maintain a position fix.
No Line of Sight, Lost GPS Tracking
You are in an area where line of sight to GPS satellites has been
blocked.
Viewing System Information
You can check software application, database version, and other
information on this screen.
Go to Main Menu
Info
System
[Tag] button: Stores the tag information. For details, refer
[DX SEEK]* button: Displays the tuning mode selection
list.
[ANALOG] button: Activating the Compulsory Analog
Radio mode. The unit will receive Analog Radio signals
only, the display will change to RBDS Tuner mode
screen and the button will be highlighted.
Touch the highlighted button to cancel the Compulsory
Analog Radio mode.
•
Make a note of this information and refer to it whenever you
communicate with customer support.
Displays the preset number/frequency.
* The button displays the current tuning mode.
This unit is able to receive signals based on the terrestrial digital radio
broadcasting standard.
When current AM/FM broadcasters are transmitting digital audio and
data services, HD Radio signals are on-the-air in their service area. You
can receive their digital broadcast and enjoy high quality sound.
If there is no HD Radio signal in the current area, after 10 seconds, this
unit will switch to receive the RBDS Radio signal automatically.
However, the display is still HD Radio mode screen.
Listening to the Radio
1
2
Press SOURCE/ on the unit.
The SOURCE selection screen is displayed.
Touch [HD Radio].
The digital radio mode is activated and the display changes
to the HD Radio Tuner Mode screen.
3
Touch [BAND] to select the desired radio band.
Each press changes the bands as follows:
FM-1
FM-2
AM
FM-1
38-EN
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4
Touch [DX SEEK]* to choose the tuning mode.
DX SEEK Local SEEK MANUAL
Tuning to Preset Stations
You can tune in the preset stations in memory on each band using the
preset number.
•
-
-
There are two modes you can select for auto tuning, DX and
Local:
DX (Distance) mode;
Both strong and weak stations will be tuned in.
Local mode;
Only strong stations will be tuned in.
The initial setting is DX.
1
2
After selecting the desired band, touch [P1/3] to
change the function guide.
Touch any one of the preset buttons [P.SET 1]
through [P.SET 6] that has a station stored to it.
The preset station is received.
* The button displays the current tuning mode.
•
When a multicast station sub channel is stored as a preset station, if
the sub channel cannot be received any longer, touch the stored
preset button, there will be no sound.
5
Touch [
], [
] or [
], [
] to change the
radio frequency up or down respectively.
In manual mode, touch and hold to change the frequency
continuously.
•
“Digital” is displayed when a digital radio station is received.
Storing the tag information of HD Radio
stations
iTunes Tagging lets you tag songs heard on HD Radio stations. You can
preview, buy and download later, songs from your iTunes tagged
playlist the next time you sync your iPod/iPhone. If the unit is
connected to a Tagging compatible iPod/iPhone, you can use the iTunes
Tagging function. For details, refer to the Owner’s Manual of the
Tagging compatible iPod/iPhone.
Presetting Stations Manually
1
Tune in a desired radio station you wish to store in
the preset memory by manual or automatic seek
tuning.
When a desired song is heard on an HD Radio station, if there is tag
information of the song, the [Tag] button will light.
2
3
Touch [P1/3] to change the function guide.
Touch and hold any one of the preset buttons
[P.SET 1] through [P.SET 6] for at least 2 seconds.
The selected station is stored.
Touch [Tag] to save its tag information.
If no iPod/iPhone is connected, “Tag Count X” is displayed (X is
the total amount of the tag information stored in this unit).
4
Repeat the procedure to store up to 5 other stations
onto the same band.
To use this procedure for other bands, simply select the
•
During tagging, the iPod/iPhone takes priority to save the tag
information. If no iPod/iPhone is connected, the tag information is
saved to this unit.
•
•
When the memory of iPod/iPhone is full, “iPod Memory Full, Tag
Count X” is displayed. The tag information will be stored to the unit.
If the tagging operation is interrupted by a hands-free phone call, the
tagging operation will be canceled and the unit will display
“Cannot Tag”.
This unit can store up to 50 pieces of tag information. When the
memory of the unit is full, “Tuner Memory Full. Connect iPod” may
be displayed.
desired band and repeat the procedure.
A total of 18 stations can be stored in the preset memory
(6 stations for each band; FM1, FM2 or AM).
•
If a preset memory has already been set in the same preset number, it
will be cleared and the new station will be memorized.
•
•
•
•
When an iPod that doesn’t support the tagging function is connected,
“Non-Tagging iPod” may be displayed.
When the iPod/iPhone is disconnected from the unit during tagging,
its tag information will be stored in the unit.
If there is stored tag information on the unit, when an iPod/iPhone
supporting the tag function is connected, the stored tag information
will be transferred to the iPod/iPhone automatically. When the iPod/
iPhone memory becomes full, “iPod Memory Full” will be displayed,
and any remaining tag information on the unit will not be transferred
to the iPod/iPhone.
Presetting Stations Automatically
The tuner can automatically seek and store 6 strong stations in the
selected band in order of signal strength.
After selecting the desired band, touch and hold
[A.MEMO] for at least 2 seconds.
The tuner automatically seeks and stores 6 strong stations into
[P.SET 1] to [P.SET 6] in order of signal strength.
When the automatic storing has been completed, the tuner goes
to the station stored in [P.SET 1].
•
If tag information already exists, “Already Tagged” will be displayed
when you try to tag information again.
•
If no stations are stored, the tuner will return to the original station
you were listening to before the automatic storing procedure began.
39-EN
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Changing the Display
RBDS Operation
Text information, such as Station name, Song title, Artist, etc. is
displayed while receiving a digital radio station.
Display example for RBDS main screen
1
Touch [INFO.]* on the HD Radio Tuner mode main
screen.
Each time you touch this button, the display changes as shown
below.
2
2
Short Station Name*
Long Station Name*
3
3
Song title*
Song title*
3
3
Artist name*
Artist name*
3
3
Album name*
Album name*
1
* This button is unavailable when a RBDS radio station is received due
to no HD Radio signal.
2
* Displays Short Station Name / Long Station Name in the Station
[Tag] button: Stores the tag information. For details, refer
Information Service Data.
* Displays Song title / Artist / Album in the main program Service
3
Data.
1
[DX SEEK]* button: Displays the tuning mode selection
list.
2
Receiving a Multicast
[PTY SEARCH]* button: Start searching for a station of
the selected program type. For details, refer to “PTY
[ANALOG] button: Touch the highlighted button to
cancel the Compulsory Analog Radio mode.
Displays the preset number/frequency.
Multicasting is the ability to broadcast multiple program streams over a
single FM frequency. This increases the amount and diversity of content
choices. A maximum of eight multicast station channels can be selected
on this unit.
When a radio station multicast is received, the “Multicast” indicator
lights.
1
* The button displays the current tuning mode.
2
* Displays only when the PTY tuning mode is selected.
The RBDS (Radio Broadcast Data System) is a radio information
system. The RBDS allows you to receive a variety of information such
as traffic information, station names.
1
2
3
Touch [
The program list is displayed.
] in the HD Radio Tuner mode.
Touch [ ] of the desired program type.
The selected program is received.
The RBDS digital data includes the following:
PS
Program Service Name
Program Type
Touch [ ] or [ ] of
The sub channel of the received radio station is changed.
on the function guide.
PTY
Recalling the RBDS Tuner mode
1
2
Press SOURCE/ on the unit.
The SOURCE selection screen is displayed.
Touch [HD Radio].
The digital radio mode is activated and the display changes
to the HD Radio Tuner Mode screen.
•
If there is no HD Radio signals in the current area, after 10 seconds,
the unit will change to the RBDS Tuner mode automatically.
3
4
Touch [P1/3] to change the function guide.
Touch [ANALOG].
“Analog only” is displayed.
The Compulsory Analog Radio mode is activated. The
display changes to the RBDS Tuner mode screen and the
[ANALOG] button will be highlighted.
40-EN
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PTY (Program Type) Tuning
Changing the Display
(Compulsory Analog Radio mode only)
FM Radio mode
Text information, such as PS (Program Service name), Song title, Artist,
etc. is displayed while receiving an FM radio station of RBDS Tuner.
1
2
3
Touch [DX SEEK]* to choose the PTY tuning mode.
The PTY mode is activated.
The Program Type of the station being currently received
will be displayed.
Touch [INFO.] on RBDS Tuner mode screen.
Each time you touch this button, the display changes as shown
below.
Touch [ ] or [ ] after activating the PTY mode to
choose the desired program type while “PTY”
(program type) is displayed.
2
PS
PS
PTY
Song title*
2
Artist name
*
PTY
Each press scrolls the program type by one.
1
2
Radio Text*
Album name*
Touch [PTY SEARCH] after selecting the program
type to start searching for a station of the selected
program type.
1
* If there is no receivable text message or the unit cannot receive a text
message properly, the display shows blank.
If no station is found, “NO PTY” will be displayed.
2
* Displays Song title / Artist / Album in the main program Service
* The button displays the current tuning mode.
Data.
•
If an RBDS radio station is received due to no HD Radio signal, the
PS, Song title, Artist name and Album name information of RBDS
radio station is displayed and cannot be changed by touching
[INFO.].
Storing the tag information of RBDS
stations
iTunes Tagging lets you tag songs heard on RBDS stations. You can
preview, buy and download later, songs from your iTunes tagged
playlist the next time you sync your iPod/iPhone. If the unit is
connected to a Tagging compatible iPod/iPhone, you can use the iTunes
Tagging function. For details, refer to the Owner’s Manual of the
Tagging compatible iPod/iPhone.
When a desired song is heard on an RBDS station, if there is tag
information of the song, the [Tag] button will light.
Touch [Tag] to save its tag information.
If no iPod/iPhone is connected, “Tag Count X” is displayed (X is
the total amount of the tag information stored in this unit).
•
During tagging, the iPod/iPhone takes priority to save the tag
information. If no iPod/iPhone is connected, the tag information is
saved to this unit.
•
•
When the memory of iPod/iPhone is full, “iPod Memory Full, Tag
Count X” is displayed. The tag information will be stored to the unit.
If the tagging operation is interrupted by a hands-free phone call, the
tagging operation will be canceled and the unit will display
“Cannot Tag”.
•
This unit can store up to 50 pieces of tag information. When the
memory of the unit is full, “Tuner Memory Full. Connect iPod” may
be displayed.
•
•
•
When an iPod that doesn’t support the tagging function is connected,
“Non-Tagging iPod” may be displayed.
When the iPod/iPhone is disconnected from the unit during tagging,
its tag information will be stored in the unit.
If there is stored tag information on the unit, when an iPod/iPhone
supporting the tag function is connected, the stored tag information
will be transferred to the iPod/iPhone automatically. When the iPod/
iPhone memory becomes full, “iPod Memory Full” will be displayed,
and any remaining tag information on the unit will not be transferred
to the iPod/iPhone.
•
If tag information already exists, “Already Tagged” will be displayed
when you try to tag information again.
41-EN
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Playback
CD/MP3/WMA/AAC
1
2
Press SOURCE/ on the unit.
The SOURCE selection screen is displayed.
Display example for MP3/WMA/AAC main screen
Touch the source icon of [DISC].
The display shows the DISC mode screen.
When a CD/MP3/WMA/AAC is inserted into the DISC SLOT
of this unit, with the label side facing up, the unit starts to
play the CD/MP3/WMA/AAC.
3
Touch [
(file).
] or [
] to select the desired track
Returning to the beginning of the current track (file):
Touch [
].
Fast reverse:
Touch and hold [
].
Advancing to the beginning of the next track (file):
[
Touch [
].
CD:
Fast forward:
Displays the Track text*1/Disc text*1.
Touch and hold [
].
•
If there is neither Track nor Disc name information, “No Text” will
be displayed.
To pause playback
Touch [
Touching [
/
].
/
MP3/WMA/AAC:
] again will resume playback.
After displaying the file name in the upper line, the track
name is displayed if there is ID3 tag information.
After displaying the folder name in the lower line, the album
name/artist name are displayed if there is ID3 tag
information.
Inserting/Ejecting a Disc
•
The INA-W910 model includes a built-in MP3/WMA/AAC unit. You
can play CD-ROMs, DVD-ROMs, CD-Rs, CD-RWs, DVD-Rs,
DVD-RWs, DVD+Rs and DVD+RWs containing MP3/WMA/AAC
files on this unit. Use the format compliant with this unit.
For further information about playing or storing MP3/WMA/AAC
WMA format files that are protected by DRM (Digital Rights
Management), AAC format files that have been purchased from
iTunes Music Store that are not DRM-Free and files that are copy-
protected cannot be played back on this unit.
CD:
2
Displays the disc number* /track number/elapsed time.
MP3/WMA/AAC:
Displays the disc number* /folder number/track number/
3
•
elapsed playback time.
1
* Displayed when a CD text disc is inserted.
* Displayed when a CD changer is connected.
* Displayed when an MP3 compatible CD changer is connected.
2
3
•
•
The unit can play discs containing both audio data and MP3/WMA/
AAC data.
The track display for CD audio data playback is the track numbers
recorded on the disc.
•
•
Three-inch (8 cm) CDs can be used.
•
•
If an MP3/WMA/AAC disc with many files and folders is played, it
takes a little longer than normal to start playback.
Touch [
] to activate the search mode. For operations, refer to
However, the search mode function does not work in the CD changer
mode.
•
The playback time may not be correctly displayed when a VBR
(Variable Bit Rate) recorded file is played back.
42-EN
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Repeat Play
About MP3/WMA/AAC
Touch [ ] to play back repeatedly the track currently
being played.
The track (file) will be played repeatedly.
CAUTION
Except for private use, duplicating audio data (including MP3/
WMA/AAC data) or distributing, transferring, or copying it,
whether for free or for a fee, without permission of the copyright
holder is strictly prohibited by the Copyright Act and by
international treaty.
Touch [ ] again and select OFF to deactivate Repeat play.
1
CD:
*
(off)
(Repeat
One)
What is MP3?
MP3/WMA/AAC:
MP3, whose official name is “MPEG-1, 2, 2.5 Audio Layer 3”, is a
compression standard prescribed by the ISO, the International
Standardization Organization and MPEG which is a joint activity
institution of the IEC.
3
1 Touch [P1/2]* to change the function guide.
2 Touch [ ] and select the desired Repeat play.
2
1
*
*
(off)
MP3 files contain compressed audio data. MP3 encoding is
capable of compressing audio data at extremely high ratios,
reducing the size of music files to as much as one-tenth their
original size. This is achieved while still maintaining near CD
quality. The MP3 format realizes such high compression ratios
by eliminating the sounds that are either inaudible to the human
ear or masked by other sounds.
(Repeat
One)
1
* If a CD Changer or an MP3 compatible CD changer is connected
and the Repeat Disc mode is selected, the unit repeatedly plays back
all tracks (files) on the disc selected.
* Only files in a folder are repeatedly played back.
* Display may vary depending on the connected devices.
2
What is AAC?
3
AAC is the abbreviation for “Advanced Audio Coding”, and is a
basic format of audio compression used by MPEG2 or MPEG4.
What is WMA?
M.I.X. (Random Play)
WMA, or “Windows Media™ Audio,” is compressed audio data.
WMA is similar to MP3 audio data and can achieve CD quality
sound with small file sizes.
Touch [ ] during playback.
The tracks (files) on the disc will be played back in a random
sequence.
Method for creating MP3/WMA/AAC files
To cancel M.I.X. play, touch [ ].
Audio data is compressed using software with MP3/WMA/AAC
codes. For details on creating MP3/WMA/AAC files, refer to the
user’s manual for that software.
MP3/WMA/AAC files that are playable on this device have the
file extensions.
1
CD:
ALL*
(off)
MP3/WMA/AAC:
4
MP3: “mp3”
1 Touch [P1/2]* to change the function guide.
2 Touch [ ] and select the desired M.I.X. play.
WMA: “wma” (Ver. 7.1, 8 , 9, 9.1 and 9.2 are supported)
AAC: “m4a”
WMA is not supported for the following files, Windows Media
Audio Professional, Windows Media Audio 9 Voice or Windows
Media Audio 9 Pro Lossless.
3
2
3
*
*
(off)
*
1
* If a CD Changer equipped with the
ALL will also be selectable.
In this mode, the tracks on all the CDs in the current magazine will
be included in the random playback sequence.
* If an MP3 compatible CD changer is connected, all files in a disc are
played back in random sequence, and playback shifts to the next disc.
* Only files in a folder are played back in random sequence in the
ALL function is connected,
There are many different versions of the AAC format. Confirm
that the software being used conforms to the acceptable
formats listed above. It’s possible that the format may be
unplayable even though the extension is valid.
2
Playback of AAC files encoded by iTunes is supported.
3
Supported playback sampling rates and bit rates
mode.
MP3
4
* Display may vary depending on the connected devices.
Sampling rates: 48 kHz, 44.1 kHz, 32 kHz, 24 kHz, 22.05 kHz,
16 kHz, 12 kHz, 11.025 kHz, 8 kHz
•
be canceled.
Bit rates:
32 - 320 kbps
WMA
Sampling rates: 48 kHz, 44.1 kHz, 32 kHz
Selecting Folders (concerning MP3/
WMA/AAC)
Bit rates:
48 - 192 kbps
AAC
Sampling rates: 48 kHz, 44.1 kHz, 32 kHz, 24 kHz, 22.05 kHz,
16 kHz, 12 kHz, 11.025 kHz, 8 kHz
Touch
[
] or [ ] to select the folder.
Bit rates:
16 - 320 kbps
This device may not play back correctly depending on sampling
rates.
43-EN
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
ID3 tags/WMA tags
If tag data is in an MP3/WMA/AAC file, this device can display
the title (track title), artist name, and album name ID3 tag/WMA
tag data (maximum 128 characters).
Root
Folder
This device can only display single-byte alphanumeric
characters and the underscore. For non-supported characters,
“No Support” is displayed.
The number of characters may be limited, or not correctly
displayed, depending on the tag information.
Playing back MP3/WMA/AAC
MP3/WMA/AAC files are prepared, then written to a CD-R,
CD-RW (DVD-R/DVD-RW) using CD-R writing software. A disc
can hold up to 4,096 files/256 folders (including Root Folders),
and the maximum number of folders is 255. Playback may not
be performed if a disc exceeds the limitations described above.
Media supported
The media that this device can play back are CD-ROMs, CD-Rs,
and CD-RWs, DVD-Rs and DVD-RWs.
Corresponding File Systems
This device supports discs formatted with ISO9660 Level 1 or
Level 2.
Under the ISO9660 standard, there are some restrictions to
remember.
Folder
MP3/WMA/AAC File
The maximum nested folder depth is 8 (including the root
directory). The number of characters for a folder/file name is
limited.
Valid characters for folder/file names are letters A-Z (all caps),
numbers 0-9, and ‘_’ (underscore).
Terminology
Bit rate
This is the “sound” compression rate specified for encoding. The
higher the bit rate, the higher the sound quality, but also the larger
the files.
This device can play back discs in Joliet, Romeo, etc. and other
standards that conform to ISO9660. However, sometimes the file
names, folder names, etc. are not displayed correctly.
Sampling rate
Formats supported
This value shows how many times per second the data is sampled
(recorded). For example, music CDs use a sampling rate of 44.1 kHz,
so the sound is sampled (recorded) 44,100 times per second. The
higher the sampling rate, the higher the sound quality, but also the
larger the volume of data.
This device supports CD-ROM XA, Mixed Mode CD, Enhanced
CD (CD-Extra) and Multi-Session.
This device cannot correctly play back discs recorded with
Track At Once or packet writing.
Order of files
Encoding
Files are played back in the order that the writing software writes
them to the disc. Therefore, the playback order may not be
what’s expected. Verity the writing order in the software’s
documentation. The playback order of the folders and files is as
follows. (The following numbers may differ from actually
displayed numbers.)
Converting music CDs, WAVE (AIFF) files, and other sound files into
the specified audio compression format.
Tag
Song information such as track titles, artist names, album names, etc.
written into MP3/WMA/AAC files.
Root folder
The root folder (or root directory) is found at the top of the file
system. The root folder contains all folders and files. It is created
automatically for all burned discs.
44-EN
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
WARNING
DVD/Video CD
It is dangerous (and illegal in many states) for the
driver to watch the DVD/TV/Video while driving the
vehicle. The driver may be distracted from looking
ahead and an accident could occur.
Display example for DVD Video main screen
Install the INA-W910 correctly so that the driver
cannot watch DVD/TV/Video unless the vehicle is
stopped and the emergency brake is applied.
If the INA-W910 is not installed correctly, the driver
will be able to watch the DVD/TV/Video while driving
the vehicle and may be distracted from looking ahead
causing an accident. The driver or other people could
be severely injured.
To display the DVD mode screen
Displays the disc (DVD VIDEO, DVD AUDIO, VIDEO
CD) being played back.
Displays the elapsed playback time.
To watch a video source, your vehicle must be parked with the ignition
key in the ACC or ON position. To do this, follow the procedures below.
1 Push the foot brake to bring your vehicle to a complete
stop at a safe location. Engage the parking brake.
2 Keep pushing the foot brake and release the parking
brake once then engage it again.
•
•
Some operations cannot be carried out depending on the disc or
playback screen.
Displays of the function guide [P1/2], etc. may vary depending on the
connected device(s).
3 While the parking brake is being engaged the second
time, release the foot brake.
Changes the Contrast Level adjustment screen directly.
For details, refer to “Adjusting Image Brilliance (Live
•
For automatic transmission vehicles, place the transmission lever in
the Park position.
Disc types that can be used for each heading are
represented by the following marks.
Now, the locking system for the DVD mode operation has been
released. Engaging the parking brake can reactivate the DVD mode, as
long as the car’s ignition has not been turned off. It is not necessary to
repeat the above procedure (1 through 3), of “To display the DVD mode
screen.”
DVD Commercial Video discs (used for the
distribution of movies, etc.) or a DVD-R/
DVD-RW, DVD+R/DVD+RW recorded in a
video mode can be used.
Each time the ignition is turned OFF, perform the procedure of “To
display the DVD mode screen.”
DVD Commercial Audio discs can be used.
Video-CD discs can be used.
•
If you try to activate the auxiliary device while driving, the display
will show the warning-Picture off for your safety.
Caution
• Not all functions will operate for every DVD. See the
individual DVD’s instructions for details on the
features supported.
Playing a Disc
• Fingerprints on a disc may adversely affect
playback. If a problem occurs, remove the disc and
check for fingerprints on the playback side. Clean
the disc if necessary.
INA-W910 has a built-in DVD player. When an optional Alpine DVD/
Video CD/CD player (or DVD changer) is connected to the INA-W910,
you can control it from the INA-W910 (except some operations).
• If you switch the power or Ignition key OFF or change
sources during playback, playback will continue
where you left off when you resume playback.
• If you try to perform an invalid operation (based on
the type of disc being played), the following mark is
displayed on the monitor screen:
.
• Play Position Memory Function
Even if you turn power off or switch the Ignition key
to OFF during playback or change the source,
playback will continue from the point where
playback stopped when the power is turned ON
again.
45-EN
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2 Touch [Key].
The menu operation mode will be displayed.
1
2
Press SOURCE/ on the unit.
The SOURCE selection screen is displayed.
Touch [DISC].
The display shows the DISC mode screen.
Insert a disc with the label side facing up. The unit starts to
play the disc.
•
•
The operation screen changes to the visual screen in the DVD or
Video CD mode for 5 seconds after an operation has been performed.
Touch the display panel to display the operation screen again.
The display mode can be changed by touching [WIDE].
Inserting/Ejecting a Disc
3 Select a desired menu item by touching [ ], [ ], [ ] or [ ].
4 Touch [Enter] to confirm the selected item.
•
•
The reverse side of a double-sided DVD will not be played
automatically.
Remove the disc, turn it over, and reinsert it.
DO NOT insert discs containing maps for the navigation system.
Doing so could result in damage.
Numeric Keypad Input Operations
1 Touch any area on DVD mode screen to display the operation
keys.
•
•
Be sure the remote input lead is connected to the remote output lead
of this unit when a DVD changer or DVD player is connected. If not
correctly connected, touch operation cannot be performed.
“Can’t Downmix” is displayed when a Downmix (multi-channel
signals are mixed into 2ch) prohibited section of a DVD-Audio disc is
played. In this case, only the Lch/Rch recorded on the disc is output
as sound. (The sound of Centre speaker, L-surround speaker,
R-surround speaker, and Subwoofer is not output.)
•
If a menu screen appears
On DVDs and Video CDs with playback control (PBC), menu screens
may appear automatically. If this happens, perform the operation
described below to start playback.
2 Touch [Key].
The menu operation mode appears.
3 Touch [Key] again.
The numeric keypad input mode screen appears.
•
To play back a DVD-Audio disc, set “VCAP” in “Setting the DVD-
Direct Menu Operations
The numeric
keypad input
screen closes
when the area is
touched while
displayed.
Touch the DVD menu directly.
•
Some operations cannot be performed depending on the disc.
Menu Operations
1 Touch any area on DVD mode screen to display the operation
keys.
Touch [ ] to close the numeric
keypad input screen.
4 Touch a desired number.
5 Touch [Enter] on the numeric keypad mode screen to confirm
your selection.
Numeric Keypad Input Operations
When PBC is turned OFF, the menu screen is not displayed. Turn
it ON to display the screen (See “Setting the Video CD Play
1 Touch [P1/2] in the Video CD mode to change to the function
guide.
2 Touch [10KEY].
The numeric keypad is displayed.
3 Touch and input a desired number.
4 Touch [Enter] to confirm.
46-EN
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Displaying the Top Menu Screen
Stopping Playback
Touch [ ] twice or touch and hold [ ] for at least 2
seconds during playback.
When a DVD contains two or more titles, the top menu screen appears.
“Stop” is displayed, and playback stops.
Touch [TOP MENU] on the DVD mode main screen.
The top menu screen appears.
•
Playback starts from the beginning when [
playback is stopped.
/
] is touched while
•
•
To perform necessary operations, see “If a menu screen appears” on
To play back a DVD-Audio disc, set “VCAP” in “Setting the DVD-
Fast-forwarding/Fast-reversing
Displaying the Menu Screen
DVD-Video, Video-CD, DVD-Audio (VCAP mode)*:
With a DVD having two or more menus, a menu screen will appear for
the programs available, in addition to the main programs.
1
During playback, touch and hold [
reverse) or [ ] (fast-forward).
] (Fast-
Touch [MENU] on the DVD mode main screen.
The menu screen appears.
When touched and held for more than 1 second, the disc is
forwarded/reversed at double speed. When held for 5 more
seconds or longer, the disc is forwarded/reversed at 8 times
the normal speed. When held for 10 seconds or longer, the
disc is forwarded/reversed at 21 times the normal speed.
•
To perform necessary operations, see “If a menu screen appears” on
Displaying the Menu Operation Mode
Screen
DVD-Audio (VOFF mode)*:
1
During playback, touch and hold [
] (Fast-
1
Touch [P1/2]* on the DVD mode main screen.
The function guide changes.
reverse) or [
] (fast-forward).
* The display differs, depending on the disc (mode).
2
Stop touching [
playback.
] or [
] to return to normal
2
Touch [MENU CONT].
The menu operation mode screen appears.
•
•
To play back a DVD-Audio disc, set “VCAP” in “Setting the DVD-
•
•
No sound is played during fast-forwarding/fast-reversing.
For DVDs and Video CDs with playback control (PBC), the menu
screen may reappear during fast-forwarding/fast-reversing.
Operation may not be possible, depending on the disc.
•
Stopping Playback (Pre Stop)
Press the stop button during playback to stop playback. That position is
stored in the memory.
1
2
Touch [ ] once during playback.
“Pre Stop” is displayed.
Touch [
/
] in the Pre Stop mode.
Playback starts from the position at which it was stopped.
•
•
For some discs, the position at which playback was stopped may not
be accurate.
To play back a DVD-Audio disc, set “VCAP” in “Setting the DVD-
47-EN
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Finding the Beginnings of Chapters/
Tracks
Slow Motion Playback
1
When [
] or [
] is touched and held while in
During playback, touch [
] or [
].
the pause mode, the 1/8th speed slow motion
The chapter/track switches each time the button is touched, and
playback of the selected chapter/track starts.
playback mode is set.
When held in for 5 more seconds, the slow motion
speed switches to 1/2 the normal speed.
: Touch this to start playback from the beginning of the
following chapter/track.
: Touch this to start playback from the beginning of the
current chapter/track.
2
Stop touching [
] to play back.
] or [
] to pause, and touch
[
/
•
•
•
No sound is played during slow motion playback.
Reverse slow motion playback is not available on the Video CD disc.
1/2, 1/8 are approximate speeds. The actual speed differs from disc to
disc.
•
•
Some DVDs do not have chapters.
Be sure to turn PBC off before starting the search (see “Setting the
Supplementary explanation
“Chapters” are divisions of movies or musical selections on
DVDs.
Repeat Playback
“Tracks” are divisions of movies or musical selections on
Video CD, DVD Audio and music CDs.
“Groups” associate a track (one song) with other tracks
stored on a DVD-Audio. Group playback differs depending
on the disc.
Use this function to play the disc’s titles, chapters or tracks, etc.
repeatedly.
DVD Video
Touch [ ].
The repeat mode switches every time the button is touched.
Playing Still Frames (Pausing)
The chapter is played repeatedly.
Repeat
The title is played repeatedly.
Repeat Title
Repeat Off
1
2
•
•
During playback, touch [
/
].
Playback returns to normal mode.
Touch [ ] to resume playback.
/
•
•
Display may vary depending on the connected devices.
The REPEAT mode is always turned off when [ ] is touched and
held for at least 2 seconds.
No sound is played during the still frame mode.
The image or sound may stop temporarily when playback starts from
the pause mode. This is not a malfunction.
Video CD
Forward/reverse frame-by-frame
Playback
During playback, touch [
The repeat mode switches every time the button is touched.
].
The track is played repeatedly.
The disc is played repeatedly.
1
In the pause mode, touch [
The picture advances or reverses by one frame each time
the button is touched.
] or [
].
*
2
•
•
Touch [
/
] to return to normal mode.
Playback does not repeat.
No sound is output during forward/reverse frame-by-frame playback.
Reverse frame-by-frame cannot be carried out on the DVD-VR disc.
* Displayed only in the changer mode.
•
•
Display may vary depending on the connected devices.
The track/disc repeat modes cannot be used on Video CDs with
playback control (PBC). These modes can be carried out after
For some discs it is not possible to switch the repeat mode.
•
48-EN
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
DVD Audio
3
Touch and enter the chapter number you want to
play.
Touch [
].
The repeat mode switches every time the button is touched.
4
Touch [Enter] to confirm your selection.
Playback will start from the selected chapter or track.
VCAP mode*:
•
This function is not available for a disc on which chapters or tracks
are not stored.
The track is played repeatedly.
The group is played repeatedly.
The playback returns to normal mode.
Switching the Angle
On DVDs in which scenes have been filmed from multiple angles, the
angle can be switched during playback.
VOFF mode*:
1
During playback, touch [P1/2]*.
The function guide changes.
The track is played repeatedly.
The group is played repeatedly.
The disc is played repeatedly.
* The display differs, depending on the disc (mode).
2
Touch [ANGLE].
The angle switches between the angles recorded on the
disc every time the button is touched.
•
•
Some time may be required for the angle to change.
Depending on the disc, the angle may switch in one of two ways.
-
-
Seamless: The angle switches smoothly.
Non-seamless: When the angle is switched, a still picture is
displayed first, after which the angle switches.
Searching by Title/Group
•
To play back a DVD-Audio disc, set “VCAP” in “Setting the DVD-
Use this function to easily find positions on the DVD using the DVD’s
titles or groups.
1
Touch [P1/2]* while playback is stopped.
The function guide appears.
Scroll to Move the Page Forward or
Backward
* The display differs, depending on the disc (mode).
“Page” is a still image stored on a DVD-Audio disc.
2
3
Touch [10KEY].
The numeric keypad input mode screen appears.
1
Touch [P1/3] twice while playing a DVD-Audio disc
in VCAP mode*.
Enter a desired title or group by touching its title or
group number.
2
Touch PAGE [ ] or [ ].
The display switches.
Touch and hold to display the home page.
4
Confirm your selection by touching [Enter].
Playback will start from the title number selected.
•
•
•
This function cannot be used on discs on which no title numbers are
recorded.
Playback starts from the beginning of the chapter/track number in the
state of Pre Stop.
•
For DVD-Audio discs without Pages, depending on the DVD-Audio
disc, the “Page” function may not be operable if images are in slide
show form.
Some disc may not accept any operation.
Switching the Audio Tracks
Searching Directly by Chapter or Track
Number
DVDs with multiplex audio or audio languages allow switching the
sound during playback.
Use this function to easily move to the beginnings of the chapters or
tracks on the disc.
1
During playback, touch [P1/2]*.
1
Touch [P1/2]* in any mode other than stop mode.
The function guide will appear.
* The display differs, depending on the disc (mode).
2
Touch [AUDIO].
The sound switches between the alternate audio tracks
* The display differs, depending on the disc (mode).
recorded on the disc every time the button is touched.
2
Touch [10KEY].
The numeric keypad input mode screen will appear.
49-EN
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
•
The alternate track selected becomes the default setting every time
the power is turned on or the disc is replaced. If the disc does not
include that track, the disc’s default language is selected instead.
Not all discs will allow changing the alternate audio tracks during
playback. In these cases, select audio tracks from the DVDs menu.
There may be a delay before the selected alternate track begins to
play.
Other Useful
Features
•
•
Video CDs with multiplex audio
Adjusting the Audio
1
2
During playback, touch [P1/2].
The function guide changes.
1
2
3
Press SOURCE/ on the unit.
The SOURCE selection screen is displayed.
Touch [AUDIO].
The left and right channels will be output as shown, each
time the button is touched.
Touch [ ] on the main source screen.
The Setup Select screen is displayed.
Audio LR
Audio LL
Audio RR
Audio LR
Touch [
] of Audio Setup.
The Audio Setup screen appears.
Switching the Subtitles
(Subtitle Language)
Display example for Audio Setup Screen
With DVDs on which multiple subtitle languages are recorded, the
subtitle language can be switched during playback; moreover, subtitles
can be hidden.
1
During playback, touch [P1/2]*.
The function guide changes.
* The display differs, depending on the disc (mode).
2
Touch [SUBT.].
•
When the optional IMPRINT audio processor (PXA-H100) or an
external audio processor is connected, the “A.Processor” list is
Touching this button repeatedly selects sequentially the
subtitle languages recorded on the disc, and then turns the
subtitles OFF.
•
To play back a DVD-Audio disc, set “VCAP” in “Setting the DVD-
There may be a delay before the selected subtitle appears.
Not all discs will allow changing the subtitles during playback. In
these cases, select subtitles from the DVDs menu.
•
•
•
Touching [ ] or [ ] will scroll the list one line at a time.
Touching [ ] or [ ] will scroll the list one page at a time.
•
•
Touching [
] to return to the previous screen.
•
The subtitle language selected becomes the default setting every time
the power is turned on or the disc is replaced. If the disc does not
include that language, the disc’s default language is selected instead.
However, the subtitle language may differ depending on the disc.
For some discs, the subtitles will be displayed even when this is set to
OFF. However, the subtitle language may differ depending on the
disc.
....This item is controllable with the INA-W910 only.
....This item is available when the optional IMPRINT
audio processor (PXA-H100) is connected.
....This item is available when an External Audio
Processor is connected.
•
Switching from the disc menu
For some discs, the audio language, angle and subtitles can be switched
from the disc menu.
1
Touch [MENU] or [TOP MENU] to display the
menu.
2
Select an item to confirm it.
•
To play back a DVD-Audio disc, set “VCAP” in “Setting the DVD-
50-EN
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Adjusting Balance/Fader
Setting the Bass Center Frequency
Touch [
] of Balance/Fader, the adjusting screen of
The displayed bass frequency is emphasized.
Touch [ ] or [ ] of Bass Freq. to select the desired bass center
frequency.
Balance/Fader will be displayed.
Display example for Balance/Fader Screen
Setting range: 63 Hz, 80 Hz, 100 Hz, 200 Hz
•
•
The operation can be performed only when the P-EQ is selected in
Setting value will change according to the frequency value set in
Band 1 of P-EQ. Refer to “Adjusting the Parametric Equalizer Curve
Setting the Bass Bandwidth
Changes the boosted bass bandwidth to wide or narrow.
A wider setting will boost a wide range of frequencies
above and below the center frequency. A narrower
setting will boost only frequencies near the center
frequency.
Touch [ ] or [ ] of Bass Bandwidth to select the desired bass
band width.
A
Adjusting the Fader
Setting range: Wide1 (Narrow) to Wide4 (Wide)
Touch [F] or [R] to adjust the volume of the front and
rear speakers.
•
•
The operation can be performed only when the P-EQ is selected in
Setting value will change according to the bandwidth value set in
Band 1 of P-EQ. Refer to “Adjusting the Parametric Equalizer Curve
Setting range: F15 to R15
•
If an optional IMPRINT audio processor (PXA-H100) is connected
to this unit and you have set the 2.2ch (3WAY)/4.2ch (FRONT/REAR/
SUBW.) switch to 2.2ch (3WAY), you cannot adjust the FADER mode.
For details, refer to the Owner’s Manual of PXA-H100.
Setting the treble level
B
You can emphasize the treble frequency.
Touch [ ] or [ ] of Treble Level to select the desired treble
level.
Adjusting the Balance
Touch [L] or [R] to adjust the sound volume of the left
and right speakers.
2
Setting range* : -6 to +6
Setting range: L15 to R15
Setting range: -7 to +7
C
Adjusting the Balance/Fader Directly
2
* Setting value will change according to the level value set in Band 5 of
P-EQ or Band 7 of G-EQ. Refer to “Adjusting the Parametric
Touch and move [ ] to a desired setting.
Or touch a desired setting range, and [ ] will move to that
location.
Touch [L] or [R] of Balance and [F] or [R] of Fader for fine-tuning.
Setting the Treble Center Frequency
Adjusting Bass/Treble
The displayed treble frequency is emphasized.
Touch [ ] or [ ] of Treble Freq. to select the desired treble
center frequency.
You can change the bass/treble frequency emphasis to
create your own tonal preference.
Touch [
] to display the Bass/Treble adjusting screen.
Setting range: 10 kHz, 12.5 kHz, 16 kHz, 17.5 kHz
•
•
Adjustment cannot be performed when Defeat is set to ON.
IMPRINT audio processor is connected, the list is not displayed.
•
•
The operation can be performed only when the P-EQ is selected in
Setting value will change according to the frequency value set in
Band 5 of P-EQ. Refer to “Adjusting the Parametric Equalizer Curve
Setting the Bass level
You can emphasize or weaken the bass frequency.
Touch [ ] or [ ] of Bass Level to select the desired bass level.
1
Setting range* : -6 to +6
Setting range: -7 to +7
1
* Setting value will change according to the level value set in Band 1 of
P-EQ or G-EQ. Refer to “Adjusting the Parametric Equalizer Curve
51-EN
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Subwoofer On and Off
Adjusting Nav. Mix Level
Touch [ ] or [ ] of Subwoofer to set to ON or OFF.
Touch [ ] or [ ] of Nav. Mix Level to adjust the volume of
navigation interruption.
OFF:
ON:
Subwoofer output is off.
Subwoofer output is on.
Setting range: 0 to 15
•
•
The setting navigation interruption is not displayed if an external
audio processor not compatible with Nav. Mix is connected.
While an External audio processor is connected, this function may
inoperable when Defeat is set to ON.
Adjusting the Subwoofer Level
When ON is set in “Subwoofer On and Off ”, the item is
displayed.
When an External Audio Processor is connected, the list is not
displayed.
Setting the Media Xpander mode
When the Media Xpander is on, you can adjust the Media
Xpander level. While the car is parked, the item is displayed.
1 Touch [
] of Subwoofer.
The display change to the Subwoofer Adjusting screen.
2 Touch [ ] or [ ] of Level to adjust the subwoofer output.
Setting range: 0 to 15
1
2
Select ON or OFF of MX by touching [ ] or [ ] of
Media Xpander.
OFF:
ON:
Turns off the MX effect of every music source.
Turns on the specified MX mode.
Switching the Subwoofer phase
When ON is set in “Subwoofer On and Off” while the car is
parked, the item is displayed.
The subwoofer output phase is toggled subwoofer normal (0°) or
subwoofer reverse (180°).
Touch [
] of Media Xpander after setting to ON.
The Media Xpander setup screen appears.
3
•
Touch [ ] or [ ] of the current MX mode.
1 Touch [
] of Subwoofer.
The display change to the Subwoofer Adjusting screen.
Music source (such as USB and CDs, etc.) level can be set.
2 Touch [ ] or [ ] of Phase to select to 0° or 180°.
MX CD (No Effect, Level 1 to 3)
CD mode processes a large quantity of data. This data is used
to reproduce the sound cleanly by making use of the data
quantity.
•
When the IMPRINT audio processor is connected, set “Changing
MultEQ mode” (page 71) to OFF while the car is parked.
Setting the Subwoofer System
When ON is set in “Subwoofer On and Off” while the car is
parked, the item is displayed.
MX CMPM (No Effect, Level 1 to 3)/MX SXM (No Effect, Level 1 to 3)
This corrects information that was omitted at the time of
compression. This reproduces a well-balanced sound close to
the original.
1 Touch [
] of Subwoofer.
The display change to the Subwoofer Adjusting screen.
MX Tuner (No Effect, Level 1 to 3 )
The medium to high frequencies become more clear, and
produces well balanced sound in all the bands.
2 Touch [ ] or [ ] of System to select to System 1 or System 2.
System 1: Subwoofer level changes according to the main
volume setting.
System 2: Subwoofer level change is different from the
main volume setting. For example, even at low
volume settings, the subwoofer is still audible.
MX DVD (No Effect, Level 1 to 3)
The dialog portion of the video is reproduced more clearly.
MX AUX (No Effect, Level 1 to 3)
Choose the MX mode that corresponds to the media connected.
•
•
•
•
When No Effect is selected, MX effect of each MX mode will be OFF.
Each music source, such as CD, MP3 can have its own MX setting.
There is no MX mode for AM radio.
MX CMPM is applied for MP3/WMA/AAC, Pandora Radio and iPod/
iPhone.
Setting the Subwoofer Channel
When ON is set in “Subwoofer On and Off” while the car is
parked, the item is displayed.
•
•
•
MX Tuner is applied for HD Radio and RBDS reception.
MX SXM is applied for SiriusXM reception.
The MX setting can be performed only when a source is currently
selected.
1 Touch [
] of Subwoofer.
The display change to the Subwoofer Adjusting screen.
2 Touch [ ] or [ ] of Channel to select to Stereo or Mono
(monaural).
•
The function is inoperable when Defeat is set to ON.
Stereo:
Mono:
Subwoofer stereo (L/R) output
Subwoofer monaural output
•
When the IMPRINT audio processor is connected, set “Changing
MultEQ mode” (page 71) to OFF while the car is parked.
Adjusting the Subwoofer Level
When an external audio processor is connected, the list is
displayed.
Touch [ ] or [ ] of Subw. Level to adjust the subwoofer output.
Setting range: 0 to 15
52-EN
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Adjusting the Time Correction
Adjusting the Frequency
Touch [ ] or [ ] of Freq. to adjust the frequency of the selected
band.
While the car is parked, this item is displayed.
Before performing the following procedures, refer to “About Time
Adjustable frequency bands: 63 Hz to 17.5 kHz (in 1/3 octave steps)
Band-1: 63 Hz~200 Hz (63 Hz)
Band-2: 160 Hz~1 kHz (160 Hz)
Band-3: 630 Hz~4 kHz (630 Hz)
Band-4: 1.6 kHz~10 kHz (1.6 kHz)
Band-5: 10 kHz~17.5 kHz (10 kHz)
1
2
Touch [
] of Time Correction.
The Time Correction screen appears.
Adjust the distance (0.0 to 336.6 cm) of a desired
speaker by touching the respective [ ] or [
]
button.
Adjusting the Level
Touch [ ] or [ ] of Level to adjust the level of selected band.
L = (distance to farthest speaker) –
(distance to other speakers)
Adjustable level: -6 to +6 dB
Setting the Bandwidth
Touch [ ] or [ ] of Q to select the bandwidth.
3
Repeat step 2 to set another speaker.
By setting these values to make its sound reach the
listening position at the same time as the sound of other
speakers.
Adjustable bandwidth: 1, 2, 3, 4
3
To adjust another band, repeat step 2 and adjust all
bands.
•
The total adjustment distance for all speakers should be less than
680 cm (268.1 inch).
•
The frequency value range of the current band should be higher than
the previous band’s setting value and lower than the next band’s
setting value.
Setting the Time Correction Unit (T.Corr Parameter)
While the car is parked, this item is displayed.
You can change the unit, (cm or inch) of time correction.
Touch [ ] or [ ] of T.Corr Parameter to select cm or Inch.
•
•
While adjusting the Parametric EQ, you should consider the
frequency response of the connected speakers.
When the Parametric EQ is adjusted, the adjustment for Graphic EQ
becomes ineffective.
Setting item: T.Corr Parameter
cm
Inch
Adjusting the Graphic Equalizer Curve (G-EQ)
cm: The unit of time correction is cm.
Inch: The unit of time correction is Inch.
When G-EQ is set in “Setting EQ mode” while the car is parked,
this item can be adjusted.
You can modify the equalizer settings to create a response curve
more appealing to your personal taste.
Setting EQ mode
While the car is parked, this item can be adjusted.
This setting gives you a choice of 5-band parametric, or 7-band
graphic equalizer.
1
2
Touch [
“Setting EQ mode”.
The G-EQ list screen appears.
] of EQ Select after selecting G-EQ in
Touch [ ] or [ ] of EQ Select to select P-EQ or G-EQ.
P-EQ: 5-band Parametric EQ.
G-EQ: 7-band Graphic EQ.
Adjust the G-EQ to your preference.
Band-1 (80 Hz) / Band-2 (250 Hz) / Band-3 (500 Hz) /
Band-4 (1,000 Hz) / Band-5 (4,000 Hz) / Band-6 (8,000 Hz) /
Band-7 (16,000 Hz)
Adjusting the Parametric Equalizer Curve (P-EQ)
When P-EQ is set in “Setting EQ mode” while the car is parked,
this item can be adjusted.
You can modify the Equalizer settings to create a response curve
more appealing to your personal taste.
Adjusting the Level
Touch [ ] or [ ] to adjust the level of selected band.
Adjustable level: -6 to +6 dB
1
Touch [
“Setting EQ mode”.
The P-EQ list screen appears.
] of EQ Select after selecting P-EQ in
3
To adjust another band, repeat step 2, and then
adjust all bands.
•
When Graphic EQ is adjusted, the adjustment for Parametric EQ
becomes ineffective.
2
Adjust the P-EQ to your preference.
Adjusting the Band
Touch [ ] or [ ] of Band to select the band to be adjusted.
Band 1 / Band 2 / Band 3 / Band 4 / Band 5
53-EN
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Adjusting Highpass Filter
Search Function
When Defeat is set to OFF, touch the title bar of H.P.F. to adjust
screen.
Touch [
] on the function guide while in the CD or MP3/
Touch [ ] or [ ] of Front H.P.F. to adjust the front speaker.
WMA/AAC mode.
Search list screen is displayed.
Setting range: OFF, 60 Hz, 80 Hz, 100 Hz
Touch [ ] or [ ] of Rear H.P.F. to adjust the rear speaker.
Setting range: OFF, 60 Hz, 80 Hz, 100 Hz
Select a desired track or folder
Touch [ ] for direct playback.
•
Select OFF when no adjustment is required.
When a hierarchical list is prepared, [
] will be displayed.
Touch [
] to display the respective hierarchy list screens.
Turning Defeat ON or OFF
Display example for Search Screen
Touch [ ] or [ ] of Defeat to set to ON or OFF.
Storing Settings in the Memory
Adjustment or setting contents of Time Correction and P/G-EQ can be
stored.
Contents that can be stored vary depends on the audio processor used.
1
2
Check whether the Defeat mode is OFF.
Touch [MEMORY] on the right side of bottom
screen.
Select directly by touching [ ], and its track (or folder/
file) is played back.
3
Within 5 seconds, touch any one of the preset
buttons [P.SET 1] through [P.SET 6] on the bottom
screen.
Touch [
] to return to the previous list screen.
[
] is displayed if there is a hierarchical list.
The setting contents are stored.
Touching [Exit] will change to the main source screen.
Scroll the list one page at a time by touching [ ] or [ ].
Scroll the list one line at a time by touching [ ] or [ ].
•
The stored contents will not be deleted even when the battery power
cord is detached.
•
•
The search function does not work on the DVD, Video CD or CD
changer.
A folder list is displayed only during MP3/WMA/AAC playback when
the DVD player (DVA-5210) or changer compatible with MP3 is
connected.
Calling up the Preset Memory
1
2
Check whether the Defeat mode is OFF.
Internal CD player mode
Touch any one of the preset buttons [P.SET 1]
through [P.SET 6] on the bottom display to select
the preset memory.
1 The track list* screen appears.
2 Touch [ ] of a desired track text*.
The selected track will be played back.
•
It takes a few moments to call up the preset memory.
* If the CD is text compatible only.
•
“No Text” is displayed in the track text list if there is no text on the
disc.
Internal MP3/WMA/AAC Player/external MP3-compatible
DVD Player/Changer Mode
1 The folder list screen appears.
Select a desired folder and then touch [
]. ([
] appears
only when a file is present in the selected folder.) The file list
screen is displayed.
•
Touch [ ] to play back the folder directly.
2 Touch [ ] of a desired file name.
The selected file will be played back.
54-EN
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Switching Display Modes
Setup
After carrying out the steps 1 to 3 of “To display the DVD mode screen”
DVD Setup
While your vehicle is parked, touch [WIDE] on the visual
source screen.
Each touch changes the display modes as follows:
DVD Setup Operation
Mode 1
(WIDE)
Mode 2
Mode 3
Mode 1
(CINEMA) (NORMAL) (WIDE)
To display the DVD Setup Menu screen:
Your vehicle must be parked with the ignition key in the ACC or
ON position. To do this, follow the procedure below.
1 Bring your vehicle to a complete stop at a safe
location. Engage the parking brake.
2 Keep pushing the foot brake and release the parking
brake once then engage it again.
3 When the parking brake is engaged for the second
time, release the foot brake.
In Mode 1 (Wide), the monitor displays a normal picture wider to
fit in a wide-screen monitor by evenly stretching out the picture
horizontally.
•
For automatic transmission vehicles, place the transmission lever
in the Park position.
Now, the locking system for the DVD mode operation has been
released. Engaging the parking brake can reactivate the DVD
Setup Menu, as long as the car’s ignition has not been turned off.
It is not necessary to repeat the above procedure (1 through 3) of
“To display the DVD mode screen.”
Each time the ignition is turned OFF, perform the procedure of “To
display the DVD mode screen.”
In Mode 2 (Cinema), the monitor displays a normal picture by
stretching out the picture horizontally and vertically. This mode is
good for displaying a cinema type picture at the 16:9 ratio.
The DVD Setup operation can be carried out after removing the
disc from the unit.
The following steps 1 to 6 are common operations to each
“Setting item” of DVD Setup. Refer to each section for details.
1
2
3
4
5
Press SOURCE/ on the unit.
The SOURCE selection screen is displayed.
In Mode 3 (Normal), the monitor displays a normal picture at the
center of the screen with a vertical black band at each side.
Touch [ ] on the main source screen.
The Setup Select screen is displayed.
Touch [
] of Source Setup.
The Source Setup screen appears.
Touch [
] of DVD Setup.
The DVD setup screen appears.
Touch [ ], [ ], etc. of the desired item to change its
setting.
Setting items:
Menu Language / Audio Language / SUBT. Language /
Country Code / Parental / Digital Out Mode / Downmix Mode /
TV Screen / Bonus Code / DVD-A Setup / File Play Mode /
DVD Play Mode / PBC
55-EN
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Display example for DVD setup screen
Setting of the Menu Language
Set the language used for the menus (title menu, etc.).
Setting item: Menu Language
Setting contents: Auto / EN / JP / DE / ES / FR / IT / SE / RU / CN
•
When “Auto” is selected, the primary menu language among the
recorded ones is played.
To play in a language other than those displayed
1 Touch [Code].
The numeric keypad screen is displayed.
2 Touch the 4-digit numeral of the language number.
Touch [Code] to display the numeric keypad input
screen.
3 Touch [Enter] to memorize the number.
Touch [ ] or [ ] to set a desired language.
Touch [ ] or [ ] to scroll a setting item list by one Line.
Setting of the Audio Language
Touch
[
]
or
[
]
to scroll a setting item list by one page.
Set the audio language produced from the speakers.
Display example for the numeric keypad input screen
Setting item: Audio Language
Setting contents: Auto / EN / JP / DE / ES / FR / IT / SE / RU / CN
•
When “Auto” is selected, the primary audio language among the
recorded ones is played.
To play in a language other than those displayed
1 Touch [Code].
The numeric keypad screen is displayed.
2 Touch the 4-digit numeral of the language number.
3 Touch [Enter] to memorize the number.
Setting of the Subtitle Language
The numeric keypad input screen closes when the area
is touched while displayed.
Set the language of the subtitles displayed on the screen.
Numeric keypad input screen
Setting item: SUBT. Language
Setting contents: Auto / EN / JP / DE / ES / FR / IT / SE / RU / CN
The numeric keypad is used if you want to play back in
a language other than that displayed, or to input your
parental lock password, etc.
•
When “Auto” is selected, the primary subtitle language among the
recorded ones is played.
6
Touch [
] to return to the previous screen.
To play in a language other than those displayed
1 Touch [Code].
Touch [Exit] to return to the main source screen that was
displayed before the setup operation was started.
The numeric keypad screen is displayed.
2 Touch the 4-digit numeral of the language number.
•
Immediately after changing the settings of DVD mode (while the
system is writing data automatically) do not turn the ignition key
(engine key) to OFF. Otherwise, the settings may not be changed.
3 Touch [Enter] to memorize the number.
Changing the language setting
The audio language, subtitle language and menu language can be set
according to your preferences.
Once set, this becomes the default language. This function is convenient
when you always want to listen in English. (The language setting is not
effective on some discs. If not, the default language is set from the
factory.)
•
•
•
When the settings are changed, the old settings are overwritten.
Make a note of the current settings before making changes. The
memory is cleared when the vehicle’s battery is disconnected.
To temporarily change the language of the current disc, either do so
from the DVD menu or by using the operation described in the
If the disc does not include the selected language, the disc’s default
language is set.
56-EN
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Changing the password
Changing the Country Code Setting
4 Touch [Input] of Password Change.
The numeric keypad screen is displayed.
5 Touch the input screen to enter a new 4-digit password.
Set the country number of which you want to set the rating level
(Parental lock).
•
Keep a note of the number somewhere safe in case you should
forget it.
Setting item: Country Code
Setting contents: Auto / Other
6 Touch [Enter] to memorize the number.
7 Touch [ ] to return to the previous screen.
Auto:
The primary country code among those recorded is
played.
Other: The setting content changes to “Other” if the desired
country code is input.
Changing the rating level temporarily
Some discs may request that you change the rating level set in
the default settings during playback. In this case, the message
appears on the monitor screen “Parental Level Change OK? [Yes]
[No].”
•
When the settings are changed, the old settings are overwritten.
Make a note of the current settings before making changes. The
settings are cleared when the vehicle’s battery is disconnected.
If this screen appears, change the level as follows:
1 Touch [Code].
2 Touch [Delete All] or [
Delete the displayed country number.
3 Touch the 4-digit country code.
•
To change parental level and play, touch [Yes].
].
When [Yes] is touched, the numeric keypad input screen is
displayed. Input the 4-digit password in “Setting the Rating Level
(Parental Lock)” you set, then touch [Enter].
•
To play without changing the parental level, touch [No].
(When [No] is touched, playback will be at the parental level set
in “Setting the Rating Level (Parental Lock).”)
4 Touch [Enter] to memorize the code.
Setting the Rating Level (Parental Lock)
Changing the Digital Output Setting
This function can help restrict the viewing of movies to children of
appropriate age levels only.
Use the following procedure to set the digital audio signal output from
this unit.
Setting item: Parental
Setting content: Input
Setting item: Digital Out Mode
Setting contents: Auto / LPCM
•
When the settings are changed, the old settings are overwritten.
Make a note of the current settings before making changes. The
memory is cleared when the vehicle’s battery is disconnected.
On unrated DVDs, playback will not be restricted even if the rating
level is set.
If you want to play back DVD software with the parental lock feature
and its use is currently restricted, change the rating level and the
country number in order to play back the DVD.
Once set, this rating level remains in memory until changed. To
enable playback of discs of higher rating levels or to cancel the
parental lock, the setting must be changed.
Not all DVDs provide a Parental Lock feature. If you are unsure
about a DVD, play it first to confirm. Do not leave DVDs accessible
to young children for whom you deem them inappropriate.
Auto:
The digital output is switched automatically according
to the type of audio signals being played.
Be sure to select “Auto” when you want to connect a
digital audio processor and play Dolby Digital audio.
“Auto” is the factory setting.
•
•
LPCM: The audio signals recorded on the disc are converted
to 48 kHz/16 bit (for DVDs) or 44.1 kHz (for Video CDs
and CDs) linear PCM audio signals for output.
•
•
1 Touch [Input].
The numeric keypad screen is displayed.
2 Touch the numeric keypad to input a 4-digit password.
The initial number is 1111. Input number are displayed
as “*”.
3 Touch [Enter] to memorize the number.
The Parental screen appears.
Set the rating level of PARENTAL
4 Touch [ ] of Parental to turn on.
5 Touch [ ] or [ ] of Parental Level to select the rating
level (1 to 8).
Select “OFF” to cancel the parental lock or if you do not
want to set a rating level. The smaller the number, the
higher the rating level.
6 Touch [
] to return to the previous screen.
57-EN
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Audio output/Optical digital audio output
Disc
Audio recording format
Digital output setting
(DVD SETUP)
Optical digital audio
output
Analog audio output
(Ai-NET, RCA output)
Format
Fs
Q
LPCM
(CD-DA,
DVD-V, DVD-A,
DVD-VR)
44.1/176.4kHz
16/20/24bit
AUTO or LPCM
AUTO or LPCM
AUTO or LPCM
44.1kHz, 16bit, LPCM
2ch (2ch Downmix)
OK
OK
OK
*
48/96/192kHz
16/20/24bit
16/20/24bit
48kHz, 16bit, LPCM 2ch
*
(2ch Downmix)
PPCM
(DVD-A)
44.1/88.2/
176.4kHz
Not output
48/96/192kHz
48kHz
16/20/24bit
16/18/20bit
Dolby Digital
(-EX)
LPCM
48kHz, 16bit, Decoded
2ch (2ch Downmix)
OK
*
(DVD-V, DVD-A,
DVD-VR)
*
AUTO
LPCM
Auto (Max 7.1ch)
OK
OK
DTS (-ES)
(CD-DA,
DVD-V, DVD-A)
44.1kHz
48/96kHz
44.1kHz
48kHz
16/20/24bit
16/20/24bit
16bit
44.1kHz, 16bit Decoded
2ch (2ch Downmix)
*
*
AUTO
LPCM
Auto (Max 6.1ch)
OK
OK
48kHz, 16bit, Decoded
2ch (2ch Downmix)
*
*
AUTO
LPCM
Auto (Max 6.1ch)
OK
OK
MPEG1Layer II
(VCD, DVD-V,
DVD-A,
44.1kHz, 16bit,
*
Decoded 2ch
*
AUTO
LPCM
Auto
OK
OK
DVD-VR)
16bit
48kHz, 16bit, Decoded
2ch (2ch Downmix)
*
*
AUTO
LPCM
Auto (Max 5.1ch)
OK
OK
MPEG2Layer II
(DVD-V, DVD-A,
DVD-VR)
44.1kHz
48kHz
16bit
44.1kHz, 16bit,
*
Decoded 2ch
*
AUTO
LPCM
Auto
OK
OK
16bit
48kHz, 16bit, Decoded
2ch (2ch Downmix)
*
*
AUTO
Auto (Max 5.1ch)
OK
OK
MPEG1/2/
2.5Layer III
(MP3, WMA)
32kHz
44.1kHz
48kHz
16bit
16bit
16bit
AUTO or LPCM
32kHz, 16bit, Decoded
2ch
AUTO or LPCM
AUTO or LPCM
44.1kHz, 16bit,
Decoded 2ch
OK
OK
48kHz, 16bit, Decoded
2ch
* Not output when playing back a DVD-Audio.
58-EN
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Setting the Downmix Mode
Setting of the Bonus Code
This function applies to Dolby Digital, DTS stream sound.
Some DVD-Audio discs include bonus group.
The 4 digit code for the bonus group can be memorized.
Refer to the information on the jacket, etc. of the disc, for the code
number.
Setting item: Downmix Mode
Setting contents: Surround / Stereo
Surround: Surround compatible Downmix
Setting item: Bonus Code
Setting content: Code
Stereo:
Stereo Downmix
1
2
Touch [Code].
The 10 key input screen is displayed.
Setting the TV Screen Mode
Use the procedure described below to modify the output screen
according to the type of TV monitor (rear monitor) being used.
This setting can also be applied for the INA-W910.
Input the 4 digit code number given on the jacket of
the disc, etc.
If the rear monitor is not connected, the screen setting is 16:9.
3
•
Touch [Enter] to memorize the number.
Setting item: TV Screen
Setting contents: 4:3 LB / 4:3 PS / 16:9
If the code number of the bonus group differs from the code number
you set in this section, the 10 key input screen automatically appears
in the display. If a new code number is input, this code number will
be replaced.
•
For some discs, the picture may not be set to the selected screen size.
(For details, refer to the explanation on the disc’s jacket.)
4:3 LETTER BOX:
Select this when connected to a conventional 4:3 size (normal
TV aspect ratio) monitor. There may be black stripes visible at
the top and bottom of the screen (when playing a 16:9 size
movie). The width of these stripes will depend upon the original
aspect ratio of the theatrical release of the movie.
Setting the DVD-Audio Playback Mode
To playback the DVD Audio Disc, you have a choice of 3 different
settings. If the disc containing DVD Video and Audio, set VCAP (Video
Capable Audio Player) or VOFF (Video OFF) to playback the DVD
Audio.
Setting item: DVD-A Setup
Setting contents: Video / VCAP / VOFF
Video:
Only DVD Video is played back if the disc contains
DVD Video and Audio.
VCAP:
VOFF:
DVD Audio is played back with Video.
DVD Audio is played back without Video.
4:3 PAN-SCAN:
Select this when connected to a conventional 4:3 size monitor.
The picture will fill the entire TV screen. However, due to the
mismatch in aspect ratio, parts of the movie at the extreme left
and right sides will not be visible (when playing a 16:9 size
movie).
Playing MP3/WMA/AAC Data
(File Play Mode)
When using discs containing both audio data and MP3/WMA/AAC
data.
Setting item: File Play Mode
Setting contents: CD / CMPM
CD:
Plays only the audio data on discs containing both
audio data and MP3/WMA/AAC data.
CMPM:
Plays only the MP3/WMA/AAC files on discs
containing both audio data and MP3/WMA/AAC
data.
•
•
Insert the disc when playback is stopped and remove the disc from
the unit before setting.
When an MP3-compatible CD changer is used, this setting cannot be
applied.
16:9 WIDE:
Select this when connected to a wide screen TV. This is the
factory setting.
59-EN
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Setting the compressed File Playback Data
SOURCE Setup
If a disc containing both a compressed video file and a compressed
audio file is used, you have a choose to play back only a video or only
audio.
Source Setup Operation
Setting item: DVD Play Mode
Setting contents: Video / Audio
Video:
Audio:
Only Video data is played back.
Only Audio data is played back.
To display the Source Setup Menu screen:
Your vehicle must be parked with the ignition key in the ACC or
ON position. To do this, follow the procedures below.
1 Bring your vehicle to a complete stop at a safe
location. Engage the parking brake.
Setting the Video CD Play Mode
2 Keep pushing the foot brake and release the parking
brake once then engage it again.
3 When the parking brake is engaged for the second
time, release the foot brake.
When playing a Playback Control (PBC) enabled Video CD, you can
choose to set PBC ON or OFF.
Setting item: PBC
Setting contents: OFF / ON
•
For automatic transmission vehicles, place the transmission lever
in the Park position.
OFF:
ON:
The PBC menu is not displayed.
The PBC menu is displayed.
Now, the locking system for the Source mode operation has been
released. Engaging the parking brake can reactivate the Source
Setup Menu, as long as the car’s ignition has not been turned off.
It is not necessary to repeat the above procedure (1 through 3) of
“To display the Source mode screen.”
Each time the ignition is turned OFF, perform the procedure of “To
display the Source mode screen.”
The following steps 1 to 6 are common operations to each
“Setting item” of Source Setup. Refer to each section for details.
1
2
3
4
Press SOURCE/ on the unit.
The SOURCE selection screen is displayed.
Touch [ ] on the main source screen.
The Setup Select screen is displayed.
Touch [
] of Source Setup.
The Source Setup screen appears.
Touch [
] of your desired Setup mode.
1
2
DVD Setup* /Radio Setup/SiriusXM Setup* /
BLUETOOTH Setup* /Pandora Setup/USB Search*
3
4
1
*
*
2
Displayed only When an optional SiriusXM Tuner Receiver Box is
The setting can be changed directly by touching [ ] or [ ].
3
*
*
4
5
Touch [ ], [ ] or [
change its setting.
], etc. of the desired item to
Radio Setup:
Tuner Condition/Digital Seek
Pandora Setup:
Pandora/Pandora Volume
6
Touch [
] to return to the previous screen.
Touch [Exit] to return to the main source screen that was
displayed before the setup operation was started.
60-EN
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Radio Setup
USB Search
“Radio Setup” is selected on the source setup main menu in step 4.
“USB Search” is selected on the source setup main menu in step 4.
Setting the TUNER (FM) tone quality (Tuner Condition)
Setting the USB Search mode
This unit can set your preferred tonal quality for the FM analog
radio stations.
The unit allows you to search for the USB Audio files by Tag
information or Explorer (File Name) mode.
Setting item: Tuner Condition
Setting item: USB Search
Setting contents: Normal / HiFi / Stable
Setting contents: Tag / File Name
Normal:
HiFi:
Standard setting
High-quality setting
Control noise
Tag:
You can use Playlists/Artists/Albums/Songs/Genres/
Composers/Folders/Files search mode to narrow
searches.
Stable:
File Name: You can search a folder/file as search files on PC.
•
Noise may be more noticeable when HiFi is set, depending on the
reception status. In this case, the Normal setting is recommended.
•
•
•
After the above setting, turn the ignition key off (ACC OFF) and on
again (ACC ON).
When a Portable audio player is connected, even though File Name
is set, the Tag information search mode will be applied.
Digital Seek Setting
Digital Seek can be set to ON/OFF.
Setting item: Digital Seek
Setting contents: OFF / ON
OFF:
SEEK UP/DOWN is used for digital and analog radio
stations. However, the strong signals have priority
during SEEK.
ON:
SEEK UP/DOWN is used only for the digital radio
station.
Pandora Setup
“Pandora Setup” is selected on the source setup main menu in step 4.
Setting the Pandora mode
To use your iPhone having the Pandora Compatible Application already
installed, set this item to ON.
Setting item: Pandora
Setting contents: OFF / ON
OFF:
ON:
The Pandora source icon is not displayed on the
source selection list.
The Pandora source icon is displayed on the source
selection list.
Adjusting the volume for the Pandora Radio
You can emphasize the Pandora Radio volume level.
Setting item: Pandora Volume
Touch [ ], [ ] to select the desired emphasize of volume level
(0 ~ +9).
61-EN
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Visual EQ Setting Operation
DISPLAY Setup
The visual setting of Bright, color, contrast, etc. can be adjusted in this
mode.
Display Setup Operation
Setting item: Visual EQ
Further setting items:
Live Contrast
Visual EQ*
Bright
Color*
Tint*
Contrast Sharp*
User Memory*
To display the Display Setup Menu screen:
* The setting is unavailable in navigation mode.
Your vehicle must be parked with the ignition key in the ACC or
ON position. To do this, follow the procedures below.
Touch [ ] or [ ] etc. of the desired item to change its
setting.
1 Bring your vehicle to a complete stop at a safe
location. Engage the parking brake.
2 Keep pushing the foot brake and release the parking
brake once then engage it again.
3 When the parking brake is engaged for the second
time, release the foot brake.
•
•
•
The settings are available in the visual source mode only.
The further setting items can be changed by touching [ ]/[ ].
Only one setting item can be displayed on each page, you can select
the desired brightness, picture tint, etc through the screen displayed.
Adjusting Image Brilliance (Live Contrast)
•
For automatic transmission vehicles, place the transmission lever
in the Park position.
The over brightness/darkness part of image will be adjusted to a proper
brilliance automatically.
Now, the locking system for the Display mode operation has been
released. Engaging the parking brake can reactivate the Display
Setup Menu, as long as the car’s ignition has not been turned off.
It is not necessary to repeat the above procedure (1 through 3) of
“To display the Display mode screen.”
Setting item: Live Contrast
Setting contents: OFF / Low / High
•
You can adjust this setting in visual source mode by touching [
directly. (In this case, the “Live Contrast” is displayed as
“Contrast”.)
]
Each time the ignition is turned OFF, perform the procedure of “To
display the Display mode screen.”
Selecting the Visual EQ Mode (Factory’s setting)
The following steps 1 to 5 are common operations to each
“Setting item” of Display Setup. Refer to each section for
details.
You can select a mode suitable for the subject image.
Further setting item: Visual EQ
Setting contents: OFF (FLAT) / Night M. / Soft / Sharp / Contrast /
P-1 / P-2
1
2
3
4
Press SOURCE/ on the unit.
The SOURCE selection screen is displayed.
OFF (FLAT): Initial Setting
Night M.:
Suitable for movies in which dark scenes
frequently appear.
Touch [ ] on the main source screen.
The Setup Select screen is displayed.
Soft:
Suitable for CGs and animated films.
Sharp:
Suitable for old movies where images are not
clearly shown.
Touch [
] of Display Setup.
Contrast:
P-1:
Suitable for recent movies.
Recalls the Visual EQ mode being stored on
The Display Setup screen appears.
Touch [ ], [ ] or [
] etc. of the desired item to
P-2:
Recalls the Visual EQ mode being saved on
change its setting.
Setting items:
Visual EQ / Dimmer / Dimmer Low Level / Function Guide Fade /
Base Color / Screen Alignment / Display
•
•
To return to the default video settings, set this function to OFF. Any
Visual EQ selection or changes made are reset their initial settings.
If any adjustments are made to the existing Visual EQ selections
(Night M., etc.), “Custom” is displayed.
5
Touch [
] to return to the previous screen.
Touch [Exit] to return to the main source screen that was
displayed before the setup operation was started.
Adjusting Brightness
•
Immediately after changing the settings of Display Mode (While the
system is writing data automatically) do not turn the ignition key
(engine key) to OFF. Otherwise, the settings may not be changed.
Further setting item: Bright
Setting content: -15 ~ +15
You can adjust the brightness between Min (-15) and Max (+15).
When it reaches the minimum or maximum point, the display
shows “Min” or “Max” respectively.
•
When any Visual EQ Preset is selected, the brightness is
automatically adjusted according to the car’s interior lighting as
long as Auto is set in “Setting the Brightness of the Backlighting”
62-EN
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Adjusting Color of Picture
Setting the Brightness of the Backlighting
Further setting item: Color
Setting content: -15 ~ +15
Backlighting is provided by a fluorescent light built into the liquid
crystal panel. The illumination control adjusts the brightness of the
backlighting based on the car ambient lighting for easier viewing.
You can adjust the color between Min (-15) and Max (+15).
When it reaches the minimum or maximum point, the display
shows “Min” or “Max” respectively.
Setting item: Dimmer
Setting contents: OFF / ON / Auto
•
Color adjustment can be made only in iPod video, DVD, Video CD
and AUX modes.
OFF:
Deactivate Auto Dimmer mode to keep the background
illumination of the monitor bright.
Adjusting Tint of Picture
ON:
Keep the background illumination of the monitor dark.
Auto:
Adjust the brightness of the background illumination of
the monitor automatically to the brightness of the car
interior.
Further setting item: Tint
Setting content: G15 ~ R15
Adjust the color from G15 to R15. “G Max” or “R Max” is
displayed at the maximum of each color.
•
When ON or Auto is set, the setting is also applied for the button
•
•
Tint adjustment can be made only in iPod video and AUX modes.
When setting PAL, you cannot adjust the TINT.
Adjusting Image Contrast
Adjusting the Minimum Level of Backlight
Further setting item: Contrast
Setting content: -15 to +15
You can adjust the brightness of the backlight (LOW). This function
could be used, for instance, to change the screen brightness while
traveling at night.
Contrast adjustment range is -15 to +15. “Low” and “High”
appear as the minimum and maximum values specified.
Setting item: Dimmer Low Level
Setting content: -15 to +15
Adjusting Picture Quality
You can adjust the level between Min (-15) and Max (+15). When
it reaches the minimum or maximum point, the display shows
“Min” or “Max” respectively.
Further setting item: Sharp
Setting content: -5 to +5
Picture quality adjustment range is -5 to +5. “Soft” and “Hard”
appear as the minimum and maximum values specified.
Setting the Function Guide display ON/OFF
•
Picture quality adjustment can be made only in iPod video, DVD,
Video CD and AUX modes.
When on is set, the function guide will be hidden automatically after no
operation is performed for 5 seconds.
Storing Visual EQ
Setting item: Function Guide Fade
Setting contents: OFF / ON
You can store the settings made for “Adjusting Image Brightness, Tint,
Depth, Picture Quality and Contrast.”
Further setting item: User Memory
Setting contents: P-1 / P-2
Switching the Font Back Display Color
1 After completing “Adjusting Brightness, Tint, Depth,
You can choose from 4 different display colors for the font back.
of User Memory and then select preset No.
“P-1” or “P-2” to which the settings are to be stored.
2 After selecting a preset No., touch [Memory].
The adjusted Visual EQ mode is stored by the above
operations.
]
Setting item: Base Color
Setting contents: Blue / Red / Green / Amber
•
You can recall the Visual EQ mode stored here from P-1 or P-2 of
63-EN
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Adjusting the Touch Panel
GENERAL Setup
Adjustment becomes necessary when the display position on the LCD
and the touch position on the touch panel do not match.
General Setup Operation
Setting item: Screen Alignment
Setting contents:
/ Reset
1 Touch [
] of Screen Alignment.
To display the General Setup Menu screen:
The adjustment screen appears.
Your vehicle must be parked with the ignition key in the ACC or
ON position. To do this, follow the procedures below.
2 Accurately touch the
corner of the screen.
mark provided in the lower left
The screen changes to the adjustment screen.
1 Bring your vehicle to a complete stop at a safe
location. Engage the parking brake.
2 Keep pushing the foot brake and release the parking
brake once then engage it again.
3 When the parking brake is engaged for the second
time, release the foot brake.
3 Accurately touch the
mark provided in the upper right
corner of the screen.
This completes adjustment, and returns to the Display
setup mode screen.
•
•
If you have touched a location other than the
mark, touch [Reset]
to restore the adjustment screen to the initial setting.
•
For automatic transmission vehicles, place the transmission lever
in the Park position.
If you touch [
] on the adjustment screen, no adjustment is done
and the Display setup screen is restored.
Now, the locking system for the General mode operation has
been released. Engaging the parking brake can reactivate the
General Setup Menu, as long as the car’s ignition has not been
turned off. It is not necessary to repeat the above procedure
(1 through 3) of “To display the General mode screen.”
Each time the ignition is turned OFF, perform the procedure of “To
display the General mode screen.”
Display On and Off
You can turn off the screen display to reduce power consumption.
This additional power enhances the sound quality.
Setting item: Display
Setting contents: OFF / ON
The following steps 1 to 5 are common operations to each
“Setting item” of General Setup. Refer to each section for
details.
•
If any button on the unit is pressed during display off mode, the
screen will be displayed for 5 seconds to show the operation before
returning to display off mode.
1
2
3
4
Press SOURCE/ on the unit.
The SOURCE selection screen is displayed.
Touch [ ] on the main source screen.
The Setup Select screen is displayed.
Touch [
] of General Setup.
The General Setup screen appears.
Touch [ ] or [ ] of the desired item to change its
setting.
Setting items:
Clock / Demonstration / Beep / Auto Scroll / Key Dimmer Level
5
Touch [
] to return to the previous screen.
Touch [Exit] to return to the main source screen that was
displayed before the setup operation was started.
•
Immediately after changing the settings of General Mode (While the
system is writing data automatically) do not turn the ignition key
(engine key) to OFF. Otherwise, the settings may not be changed.
64-EN
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Displaying the Time
SYSTEM Setup
The clock indication on the monitor display is turned on or off
respectively.
System Setup Operation
Setting item: Clock
Setting contents: OFF / ON
•
•
The clock of the unit will be automatically updated according to the
data that the Navigation System provides, and cannot be adjusted
manually.
If the GPS antenna is not connected correctly, the clock indication on
the unit may be wrong because the time information cannot be
received. In this case, it is suggested to set “Clock” to “OFF”.
To display the System Setup Menu screen:
Your vehicle must be parked with the ignition key in the ACC or
ON position. To do this, follow the procedures below.
1 Bring your vehicle to a complete stop at a safe
location. Engage the parking brake.
2 Keep pushing the foot brake and release the parking
brake once then engage it again.
3 When the parking brake is engaged for the second
time, release the foot brake.
Demonstration Function
This unit is equipped with a demonstration function capable of showing
basic operations of respective sources on the monitor display.
•
For automatic transmission vehicles, place the transmission lever
in the Park position.
Setting item: Demonstration
Setting contents: OFF / ON
Now, the locking system for the System mode operation has been
released. Engaging the parking brake can reactivate the System
Setup Menu, as long as the car’s ignition has not been turned off.
It is not necessary to repeat the above procedure (1 through 3) of
“To display the System mode screen.”
ON: Turns on the demonstration mode to show the basic
operations.
OFF: Turns off the demonstration mode.
•
The demonstration operation is automatically repeated until the
function is turned off.
Each time the ignition is turned OFF, perform the procedure of “To
display the System mode screen.”
Sound (Beep) Guide Function
The following steps 1 to 5 are common operations to each
“Setting item” of System Setup. Refer to each section for details.
Setting item: Beep
Setting contents: OFF / ON
OFF: Deactivate the Sound Guide mode. The sound guide
beep will not be produced when a soft or a unit button is
pressed.
1
2
3
4
Press SOURCE/ on the unit.
The SOURCE selection screen is displayed.
ON: Activate the Sound Guide mode.
Touch [ ] on the main source screen.
The Setup Select screen is displayed.
•
This setting is unavailable for the navigation mode.
About the button sounds setting of navigation mode, refer to “Button
Touch [
] of System Setup.
The System Setup screen appears.
Touch [ ] or [ ] etc. of the desired item to change
its setting.
Setting the Scroll
Scroll display is available if CD text, folder name, file name or tag
information is entered.
Setting items:
Remote Sensor* / Camera IN / AUX1 IN / AUX2 IN / AUX Out /
BLUETOOTH IN / Optical Out / Rear Source*
Setting item: Auto Scroll
Setting contents: OFF / ON
* Displayed only when AUX Out is ON.
OFF: Turns off the Auto scroll mode. Scroll display is done
once as a track is changed.
ON: Turns on the Auto scroll mode. Scroll display is repeated
5
Touch [
] to return to the previous screen.
Touch [Exit] to return to the main source screen that was
displayed before the setup operation was started.
as long as the mode is turned on.
•
Immediately after changing the settings of System Mode (while the
system is writing data automatically) do not turn the ignition key
(engine key) to OFF. Otherwise, the settings may not be changed.
•
•
The display scrolls on the unit when the screen is filled up.
Song, artist and album name, etc. scrolls when an iPod/iPhone is
connected.
•
Short/Long Station name, Song, Artist, and album name scrolling are
displayed in HD Radio mode.
Adjusting the Dimmer of Button Lighting at
Night
You can adjust the brightness of the button lighting at night with the
dimmer.
Setting item: Key Dimmer Level
Setting level: -2 to +2
65-EN
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Adjusting the Rear Camera Guide line
Switching the function of the remote
sensor
You can adjust the rear camera guide line position.
Further Setting item: Guide Line Adjustment
For remote control operation, the remote sensor of the external device
(monitor, etc.) can be switched, as you prefer.
1
2
Touch [
] of Guide Line Adjustment.
The guide line adjustment screen is displayed.
Setting item: Remote Sensor
Setting contents: Front / Rear
Touch the guide pylon you intend to adjust.
Front: The remote sensor of this unit is effective.
Rear: The remote sensor of the external monitor
connected to AUX OUT of this unit becomes
effective. The remote control operates the source
connected to the AUX OUT terminals.
•
When an optional DVD changer or DVD player is connected, and the
remote control sensor is set to Rear, some soft button operations
( [ ] STOP, etc.) cannot be performed. In this case, set the remote
control sensor to Front.
Setting the Camera Input
3
4
Touch [ ], [ ], [ ] or [ ] to adjust the position of
the guide.
With an optional camera connected, video of camera is output to the
monitor. Depending on the connected camera, set this item to “Direct”
or “RCA”. For detailed information of the optional camera, refer to the
After moving the guide, when you touch [ ], the guides in
the horizontal row are aligned in a row.
After the adjustment is completed, touch [OK].
Setting item: Camera IN
Setting contents: OFF / Direct / RCA
You can touch [Reset] during adjustment to return to the
OFF:
The Camera mode cannot be used.
default adjustment.
Direct: Use when the optional direct camera is connected.
Selecting the camera
RCA: Used when connecting to an optional camera with
RCA output connector.
Depending on the connected camera, set this item to “Topview”,
“Front” or “Rear”.
•
By shifting to reverse (R), the rear pictures are output.
This function is effective when the reverse wire is properly connected.
Setting item: Camera Select
Setting contents: Topview*1 / Front / Rear
After setting this item to Direct or RCA, touch [
] of Camera IN, the
About the setting information of the optional Alpine camera, refer
to the table below.
following further setting items can be adjusted.
Rear camera guide line display setting
Direct Camera
RCA Camera*2
You can set whether the rear camera guide line is displayed or
not.
Front
Rear
HCE-C200F*3
—
HCE-C300R
HCE-C117D
HCE-C200R*3
HCE-C115
Further Setting item: Guide Line
Setting contents: OFF / ON
1
*
This setting item is prepared for the Alpine Topview camera.
This setting item is displayed only when Camera IN is set to RCA,
Any front or rear camera which has the RCA video output can also
be connected to this unit.
If both front camera HCE-C200F and rear camera HCE-C200R are
connected, please set “Camera IN” to “RCA” and “Camera Select”
to “Rear”.
2
3
*
*
Turning View Change Function ON/OFF
Depending on the connected camera, the view angle of camera
may be changed.
When a camera with View Change Function is connected, set
this item to ON.
Setting item: View Change Func.*
*
Displayed only when Camera IN is set to Direct and the rear camera
66-EN
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Setting the AUX1 Mode
Setting the AUX2 Mode
Setting item: AUX1 IN
Setting contents: OFF / ON
Setting item: AUX2 IN
Setting contents: iPod Video / AUX
OFF:
ON:
AUX1 source is not displayed.
AUX1 source is displayed.
iPod Video: Set when an iPhone or a video compatible iPod is
connected to the iPod (V)/AUX Input Connector.
AUX:
Set when an optional AV/RCA interface cable
(4-pole mini AV plug to 3-RCA) is connected. A DVD
player etc. with RCA audio/video output can be
connected to this unit. In this case, the iPod video
will not be displayed.
•
•
OFF is not displayed when the optional DVD player or DVD changer
is connected. During System setup, although the AUX1 name can be
changed, it is not displayed on the source selection screen.
When OFF is selected, the settings related to AUX1 cannot be
changed from this unit.
•
When the current source is iPod video or AUX2, this setting cannot
be adjusted.
Adjusting the AUX1 name Mode
After setting to ON in “Setting the AUX1 Mode”, this setting can be
carried out.
Adjusting the External Input Audio Level of AUX2
Further Setting item: Level
Setting contents: Low / High
1
Setting items: Primary / Secondary
*
Setting contents: OFF *2 / AUX*3 / DVD / Game / EXT.DVD / DVD
Low:
Decreases the external input audio level.
Increases the external input audio level.
CHG / USB Video / DTV
High:
1
* When a USB Video box or TV Tuner (both are sold separately and
cannot be connected at the same time) is connected, you can use it to
connect one more External Input device. Setting the Secondary name
can change the source name display of this device.
* The setting is only available for Secondary.
* The setting is only available for Primary.
•
This setting item is adjustable only when AUX2 IN is set to AUX.
Switching the Visual Input Signal System of AUX2
2
3
Further Setting item: Signal
Setting contents: NTSC/PAL / Auto
•
•
The selected source name is displayed instead of AUX1 source name.
You can set Secondary name only when Primary name is set to
DTV or USB Video. And you cannot set the same name as in Primary
name.
•
•
The video input type can be changed.
When set to Auto, unstable display may occur while playing back
certain black and white video signal. In this case, select NTSC or
PAL mode manually.
Adjusting the External Input Audio Level of AUX1
•
This setting item is adjustable only when AUX2 IN is set to AUX.
After setting to ON in “Setting the AUX1 Mode”, this setting can be
carried out.
Setting the Picture Output
Setting item: Level
Setting contents: Low / High
Outputs the picture of the source selected on the INA-W910 connected
to the rear monitor.
Low:
Decreases the external input audio level.
Increases the external input audio level.
Setting item: AUX Out
Setting contents: OFF / ON
High:
OFF:
The “Remote Sensor” and “Rear Source” items are
not displayed on the System Setup screen.
The “Remote Sensor” and “Rear Source” items are
displayed on the System Setup screen.
Switching the Visual Input Signal System of AUX1
After setting to ON in “Setting the AUX1 Mode”, the video input type
can be changed.
ON:
Setting item: Signal
Setting contents: NTSC/PAL / Auto
Setting the BLUETOOTH Connection
(BLUETOOTH IN)
NTSC/PAL: Choose the video input signal type manually.
Auto:
The suitable video input signal type will be
automatically chosen between NTSC and PAL.
Setting item: BLUETOOTH IN
Setting contents: OFF / ON
•
When set to Auto, unstable display may occur while playing back
certain black and white video signal. In this case, select NTSC or
PAL mode manually.
OFF:
ON:
BLUETOOTH function is not used.
Select when you would like to pair your Bluetooth
compatible phone with this unit.
•
•
If mobile phone compatible with the Voice-Dial function is
connected, the Voice-Dial function can be used.
67-EN
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Setting the Digital Output
SiriusXM Setup
To connect an audio processor using the optical digital output, set to
“ON” by the following procedure.
SiriusXM Setup Operation
Setting item: Optical Out
Setting contents: OFF / ON
The operation can be performed when the optional SiriusXM Tuner is
connected.
•
Afterwards, set ACC to OFF once, then turn it ON again. The setting
of Digital Output is decided.
To display the SiriusXM Setup Menu screen:
Your vehicle must be parked with the ignition key in the ACC or
ON position. To do this, follow the procedures below.
Setting the Rear Entertainment System
The rear entertainment function independently routes different sources
to the front and the rear inside a car. For example, while listening to the
radio or other audio source in the front, DVD can be enjoyed in the rear
with the optional rear monitor and headphones.
1 Bring your vehicle to a complete stop at a safe
location. Engage the parking brake.
2 Keep pushing the foot brake and release the parking
brake once then engage it again.
3 When the parking brake is engaged for the second
time, release the foot brake.
Setting item: Rear Source
Setting contents: OFF / Disc / iPod / AUX / Game / DVD / DTV /
EXT.DVD / DVD CHG. / USB Video / AUX2
•
For automatic transmission vehicles, place the transmission lever
in the Park position.
•
•
Select OFF to cancel the rear entertainment mode.
The display of setting contents may vary depending on the setting
and connected device.
Now, the locking system for the Sirius mode operation has been
released. Engaging the parking brake can reactivate the SiriusXM
Setup Menu, as long as the car’s ignition has not been turned off.
It is not necessary to repeat the above procedure (1 through 3) of
“To display the SiriusXM mode screen.”
Each time the ignition is turned OFF, perform the procedure of “To
display the SiriusXM mode screen.”
The following steps 1 to 6 are common operations to each
“Setting item” of SiriusXM Setup. Refer to each section for
details.
1
2
3
4
5
Press SOURCE/ on the unit.
The SOURCE selection screen is displayed.
Touch [ ] on the main source screen.
The Setup Select screen is displayed.
Touch [
] of Source Setup.
The Source Setup screen appears.
Touch [
] of SiriusXM Setup.
The SiriusXM setting Setup menu appears.
Touch [
] of the desired item to change its setting.
Setting items:
Alert Setup / Game Alert Setup / Parental Lock / Signal
Indicator
6
Touch [
] to return to the previous screen.
Touch [Exit] to return to the main source screen that was
displayed before the setup operation was started.
68-EN
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Setting ON/OFF of all Songs/Artists/Games Alert
Managing Artist, Song and Sports Team
Alerts
Determines whether the received alert of all stored Songs/Artist/Games
is set or not.
Touch [ ] or [ ] of the Alert to select ON/OFF.
The following operations can be performed to manage the stored Songs,
Artists and Sports teams information. (To learn about how to store the
Set to receive alert.
No alert.
ON:
OFF:
Deleting all stored Alert
Setting item: Alert Setup
The operation will delete all stored songs, artists and teams alert
information.
Touch [
] of the Alert Setup.
The display changes to Alert Setup menu screen.
1
2
Touch [
A message is displayed.
] of the Delete All alert.
Setting the Alert individually for a Song/Artist/
Sport Team
Touch [Yes] to clear the information of all stored
Artist, Song, and Game alert items.
Touch [No] to cancel.
You can manage the stored Alert (Songs, Artists, Sports teams)
individually by this setting.
1
Touch [
The Alert List screen is displayed.
] of the Alert list.
Setting the Favorite Sports Team Alerts
Display example for Alert List screen
This menu option allows you to select your favorite teams, organized by
leagues, so that you will be alerted later when your favorite teams are
playing on other channels. Some sports, individuals are considered
‘teams’.
Setting item: Games Alert Setup
1
2
3
Touch [
] of the Games Alert Setup.
The display changes to Sports setting screen.
Touch [
] of your desired league.
The display changes to the team list of the selected league.
Touch the abbreviations for your favorite teams.
Once selected, you will be alerted when games that those
teams are playing in can be heard on a SiriusXM channel.
A “Team Saved X Used/Y Empty” pop up screen is
displayed.
X is the total number of song titles, artist names or sports
team stored in memory, and Y is the total number of memory
song titles, artist names or sports teams still available for
storage.
Displays the type of the stored Alert.
: Song Alert
: Artist Alert
: Sports team Alert
Displays the ON/OFF of Alert.
: ON
: OFF
•
•
Teams that you have selected will be indicated with an asterisk “*”.
If the memory is full, you cannot select a new team.
Displays the song, artist or team name.
Scroll the list one line at a time by touching [ ] or [ ].
Scroll the list one page at a time by touching [ ] or [ ].
To add another team alert, you need to delete a selected one first.
Touch the team (with “*” mark) you want to delete, a message will
display. Touch [Yes] to delete it and touch [No] to cancel. You can
also delete a team from the Alertlist, for details, refer to “Managing
2
3
Touch [
] of the desired song, artist or team.
The Alert list setting screen is displayed.
•
You can unselect all of the teams for a given league by touching the
“None” entry and confirming that request by touching “Yes” when
asked “Delete?”.
Touch [ ] or [ ] of the Song Alert, Artist Alert or
Game Alert.
Set to ON if you want to receive this alert.
Set to OFF if you do not want to receive this alert.
•
Touching [
] of Delete after step 2 will delete this Alert.
69-EN
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Changing the Lock Passcode
Setting the Parental Lock
4
5
Touch [
] of Edit Code.
The numeric keypad screen is displayed.
You can lock out channels with passcode protection. Channels that are
locked cannot be accessed without entering the passcode. You can
unlock a channel or change the passcode using this menu option.
Use the keypad to enter the current (old) 4-digit
passcode.
(The initial passcode is set to 0000).
Setting item: Parental Lock
Touch [Enter] to confirm the entry.
Touch [Delete All] to erase all of the digits that you entered.
1
2
Touch [
] of the Parental Lock.
The numeric keypad screen is displayed.
Touch [
] to erase the last digit you entered.
Touch [ ] or [
] or [Exit] to abort changing the
Touch the numeric keypad to input a 4-digit
passcode.
passcode.
The initial number is 0000.
Input number are displayed as “*” (asterisk).
6
7
Now use the keypad to enter the new 4-digit
passcode.
Touch [Enter] to confirm the entry.
3
Touch [Enter] to confirm the passcode.
Or touch [ ] to cancel entry of the passcode or touch
[Delete All] to erase the digits that you have entered so you
can start over or touch [
entered.
Then use the keypad to enter the new 4-digit
passcode a second time to verify it.
Touch [Enter] to confirm the entry.
] to erase the last digit that you
The message “Code Saved” will be displayed.
After the correct passcode is entered, the Parental Lock
options menu is display.
•
Remember to keep a note of the passcode in a safe place in case you
forget the code.
Clearing the Lock of ALL the locked Channels
8
Touch [
] to return to the previous screen.
4
5
Touch [
] of Clear All.
Touch [Yes] to clear the lock of all the locked
channels.
Touch [No] to cancel.
Signal Strength Information
While listening to a SiriusXM Channel, the Signal strength of the
current channel will be displayed.
Setting the Lock status of individual channels
Setting item: Signal Indicator
4
Touch [
] of Locked Channels.
This menu item displays the SiriusXM signal strength as Strong, Good,
Weak or No Signal.
The channels list screen is displayed.
Display example for Locked Channels screen
•
If the Signal Indicator reports Weak or No Signal and your vehicle is
parked outside with no obstructions to the southern sky, then your
SiriusXM antenna may not be properly installed or may have become
damaged.
The Locked channel is marked with “L”.
5
6
Touch the desired channels to lock or unlock it.
Touch [ ] to return to the previous screen.
70-EN
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Adjusting Sound Setting in Manual Mode
IMPRINT Operation
(Optional)
You can change these sound settings to create your own preference
when the MultEQ mode is set to OFF (Manual Mode).
Use steps 1 to 6 to select one of the Sound menu
modes to modify. See the applicable section below for
details about the selected item.
Alpine introduces IMPRINT - the world’s first technology that
thoroughly eliminates in-car acoustic problems that normally degrade
sound quality, which enables us to experience music the way the artist
intended. When the IMPRINT audio processor (PXA-H100) (sold
separately) is connected to this unit, MultEQ and the following sound
adjustment can be performed.
1
2
Check whether the Defeat mode is off.
Press SOURCE/ on the unit.
The SOURCE selection screen is displayed.
To display the IMPRINT Setup Menu screen:
Your vehicle must be parked with the ignition key in the ACC or
ON position. To do this, follow the procedures below.
3
4
5
6
Touch [ ] on the source selection screen.
The Setup Select screen is displayed.
1 Bring your vehicle to a complete stop at a safe
location. Engage the parking brake.
2 Keep pushing the foot brake and release the parking
brake once then engage it again.
3 When the parking brake is engaged for the second
time, release the foot brake.
Touch [
] of Audio Setup.
The Audio Setup screen appears.
Touch [A.Processor].
The A.Processor SETUP screen appears.
•
For automatic transmission vehicles, place the transmission lever
in the Park position.
Touch [ ], [ ] or [
], etc. of the desired item to
change its setting.
Now, the locking system for the IMPRINT mode operation has
been released. Engaging the parking brake can reactivate the
IMPRINT Setup Menu, as long as the car’s ignition has not been
turned off. It is not necessary to repeat the above procedure
(1 through 3) of “To display the IMPRINT mode screen.”
Each time the ignition is turned OFF, perform the procedure of “To
display the IMPRINT mode screen.”
Setting items: Media Xpander / X-Over / Time Correction /
T.Corr Parameter / G-EQ / P-EQ / F-EQ / TW Setup*
* This function can be operable only when PXA-H100 (sold
separately) is connected and 2.2ch (3WAY) mode is set. For details,
refer to the Owner’s Manual of PXA-H100.
•
•
•
Touching [Exit] will change to the main source screen.
Touching [ ] to return to the previous screen.
Media Xpander, F-EQ, P-EQ and G-EQ Adjustment are inoperable
when Defeat is set to ON.
Changing MultEQ mode
MultEQ, developed by Audyssey Labs, automatically corrects the audio
for the listening environment. The system is optimized for selected
positions in the vehicle. To accomplish this, MultEQ must take
measurements of the vehicles response characteristics. For details on the
set up procedure, consult your authorized Alpine dealer.
Equalizer Presets (F-EQ)
10 typical equalizer settings and 6 user’s preset setting are preset at the
factory for a variety of musical source material.
Setting item: F-EQ
1
2
3
Press SOURCE/ on the unit.
The SOURCE selection screen is displayed.
1
2
Touch [
The F-EQ setup screen appears.
] of F-EQ.
Touch [ ] on the main source screen.
The Setup Select screen is displayed.
Touch [ ] or [ ] of the desired type to set to ON.
Flat / Pops / Rock / News / Jazz&Blues / Electrical Dance /
Hip Hop&Rap / Easy Listening / Country / Classical / User1 /
User2 / User3 / User4 / User5 / User6
After touching [ ] to display the IMPRINT Setup
adjusting item, touch [
] of IMPRINT Setup, the
MultEQ mode selection screen will be displayed.
•
•
Only one type can be set to ON.
By selecting User’s 1 to 6, you can recall the stored preset number in
4
Touch [ ] or [ ] to change the setting.
Setting contents: OFF / Curve 1/Curve 2
OFF:
Adjusting the audio settings manually to create your
own preference.
Curve 1/
Curve 2: Correcting the audio for the listening environment
automatically.
•
•
The Curve mode can be selected only when curve 1 and curve 2 are
stored.
When MultEQ is set to Curve 1 or Curve 2, Media Xpander, X-Over,
Time Correction, Subwoofer Phase, Subwoofer Channel, TW Setup,
P-EQ, G-EQ and F-EQ cannot be adjusted.
71-EN
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MX CD (OFF, CD MX 1 to 3)
Setting the Response Slope for the High
Range Speaker (TW Setup)
CD mode processes a large quantity of data. This data is used
to reproduce the sound cleanly by making use of the data
quantity.
Depending on the response characteristics of the speaker, care should be
taken when setting the response slope of the high range speaker to
(X-OVER)” on page 73), as speaker damage may result.
MX CMPM (OFF, CMPM MX 1 to 3) / MX SXM (OFF, SXM MX 1 to 3)
This corrects information that was omitted at the time of
compression. This reproduces a well-balanced sound close to
the original.
MX Tuner (OFF, Tuner MX 1 to 3 )
Setting item: TW Setup
The medium to high frequencies become more clear, and
produces well balanced sound in all the bands.
Touch [ ] or [ ] of TW Setup to select Factory’s or
User’s.
MX DVD (OFF, MOVIE MX 1 to 2)
The dialog portion of the video is reproduced more clearly.
(DVD MUSIC)
This disc contains a large quantity of data such as music clip.
MX uses this data to reproduce the sound accurately.
Factory’s: As protection from possible speaker damage, FLAT
cannot be set for the response slope of the high
range speaker in 2.2ch (3WAY) mode.
User’s:
The FLAT setting is possible in 2.2ch (3WAY) mode.
MX AUX (OFF, CMPM MX, MOVIE MX, MUSIC MX)
Choose the MX mode (CMPM, MUSIC, or MOVIE) that
corresponds to the media connected.
•
The TW Setup mode can only be selected if the FRONT/REAR/
SUBW. (4.2CH)/3WAY (2.2CH) switch on the IMPRINT audio
processor (PXA-H100) is set to 3WAY (2.2CH).
•
•
When OFF is selected, MX effect of each MX mode will be OFF.
Each music source, such as radio, CD and MP3 can have its own MX
setting.
Setting the MX Level (Media Xpander)
•
•
MX mode does not function when MX is ON for AM radio.
MX CMPM is applied for MP3/WMA/AAC, Pandora Radio and iPod/
iPhone.
MX Tuner is applied for HD Radio and RBDS reception.
MX SXM is applied for SiriusXM reception.
The MX setting can be performed only when a source is currently
selected.
MX (Media Xpander) makes vocals or instruments sound distinct
regardless of the music source. The FM radio, CD, Flash memory and
iPod/iPhone, will be able to reproduce the music clearly even in cars
with a lot of road noise.
•
•
•
Setting item: Media Xpander
1
2
Touch [ ] or [ ] of Media Xpander to select ON or
OFF.
Adjusting the Parametric Equalizer Curve
(P-EQ)
OFF:
ON:
Turns off the MX effect of every music source.
Turns on the specified MX mode.
You can modify the Equalizer settings to create a response curve more
appealing to your personal taste.
Touch [
] after setting to ON.
The Media Xpander setup screen appears.
Setting item: P-EQ
3
•
Touch [ ] or [ ] of the desired MX mode.
1
2
3
Select L+R by touching [ ] of P-EQ.
When graphic EQ is set to L+R, the setting will be turned off.
Music source (such as radio broadcasts and CDs, excluding AM
radio) level can be set.
Touch [
] of P-EQ after selecting L+R.
The P-EQ list screen appears.
Adjust the P-EQ to your preference.
Adjusting the Band
Touch [ ] or [ ] of Band to select the band to be adjusted.
Band 1 / Band 2 / Band 3 / Band 4 / Band 5
72-EN
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Adjusting the Frequency
Setting the Time Correction Unit (T.Corr
Parameter)
Touch [ ] or [ ] of Freq. to adjust the frequency of the
selected band.
You can change the unit, (cm or inch) of time correction.
Touch [ ] or [ ] of T.Corr Parameter to select cm or Inch.
Adjustable frequency bands:
20 Hz to 20 kHz (in 1/3 octave steps)
Band-1: 20 Hz~80 Hz (63 Hz)
Band-2: 50 Hz~200 Hz (150 Hz)
Band-3: 125 Hz~3.2 kHz (400 Hz)
Band-4: 315 Hz~8 kHz (1 kHz)
Band-5: 800 Hz~20 kHz (2.5 kHz)
Setting item: T.Corr Parameter
cm
Inch
cm: The unit of time correction is cm.
Inch: The unit of time correction is Inch.
Adjusting the Level
Touch [ ] or [ ] of Level to adjust the level of selected
band.
Adjusting the Time Correction
Adjustable level: -6 to +6 dB
Before performing the following procedures, refer to “About Time
Setting the Bandwidth
Setting item: Time Correction
Touch [ ] or [ ] of Q to select the bandwidth.
Adjustable bandwidth: 1, 1.5, 3
1
2
Touch [
] of Time Correction.
The Time Correction adjustment screen appears.
4
To adjust another band, repeat step 3 and adjust all
bands.
Adjust the distance (0.0 to 336.6 cm) of a desired
speaker by touching the respective [ ] or [
button.
•
•
The frequencies of adjacent bands cannot be adjusted within 4 steps.
While adjusting the Parametric EQ, you should consider the
frequency response of the connected speakers.
When the parametric EQ is adjusted, the adjustment for graphic EQ
becomes ineffective.
]
L = (distance to farthest speaker) –
(distance to other speakers)
•
Adjusting the Graphic Equalizer Curve
(G-EQ)
3
Repeat step 2 to set another speaker.
Set these values to achieve simultaneous sound
You can modify the equalizer settings to create a response curve more
appealing to your personal taste.
propagation to the listening position from all speakers.
Adjusting the Crossover Settings (X-OVER)
Setting item: G-EQ
Before performing the following procedures, refer to “About the
1
Select L+R by touching [ ] of G-EQ.
When parametric EQ is set to L+R, this setting will be turned
off.
Setting item: X-Over
1
Touch [ ] or [ ] of X-Over to select L+R or L/R.
2
3
Touch [
The G-EQ list screen appears.
] of G-EQ after selecting L+R.
L+R: Sets the same adjustment values for the left and right
channels.
Adjust the G-EQ to your preference.
L/R: Different adjustment values can be set for the left and
right channels.
Adjusting the Band
Touch [ ] or [ ] of Band to select the band to be adjusted.
2
3
Touch [
] of X-Over.
A speaker list on the X-Over screen is displayed.
Band-1 (63 Hz) / Band-2 (150 Hz) / Band-3 (400 Hz) /
Band-4 (1 kHz) / Band-5 (2.5 kHz) / Band-6 (6.3 kHz) /
Band-7 (17.5 kHz)
Touch [
] of the band to be adjusted.
The screen changes to the X-Over screen to be adjusted.
Adjusting the Level
4.2ch (FRONT/REAR/SUBW.) System
Touch [ ] or [ ] of Level to adjust the level of selected
band.
4.2ch (FRONT/REAR/SUBW.) System / (L+R)
Adjustable output level: -6 to +6 dB
Setting contents:
4
To adjust another band, repeat step 3, and then
adjust all bands.
Low (SUB-W) / Mid (REAR) / High (FRONT)
4.2ch (FRONT/REAR/SUBW.) System / (L/R)
•
When graphic EQ is adjusted, the adjustment for parametric EQ
becomes ineffective.
Setting contents:
Low (SUB-W)-L / Low (SUB-W)-R / Mid (REAR)-L /
Mid (REAR)-R / High (FRONT)-L / High (FRONT)-R
73-EN
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4
Adjust the crossover to your preference.
Adjusting the Level
Touch [ ] or [ ] of Level, then adjust the HPF or LPF level.
Selecting the Cut-Off Frequency
Adjustable output level: -12 to 0 dB.
Touch [ ] or [ ] of Freq., then select the cut-off frequency
(crossover point).
Adjusting the Slope
The adjustable bandwidth differs depending on the speaker
(channel).
Touch [ ] or [ ] of Slope, then adjust the HPF or LPF slope.
Adjustable slope: FLAT*, -6 dB/oct., -12 dB/oct., -18 dB/oct.,
-24 dB/oct.
4.2ch (FRONT/REAR/SUBW.) System
*
FLAT can be set for the HIGH slope only when User’s is selected in
Setup)” (page 72). Depending on the response characteristics of the
speaker, care should be taken when setting the response slope to
FLAT, as speaker damage may result. With this unit, a message is
displayed when the response slope for the high range speaker is set
to FLAT.
Setting contents:
Low (SUB-W)
Mid (REAR)
High (FRONT)
20 Hz~200Hz
20 Hz~200Hz
20 Hz~200Hz
Adjusting the Slope
Touch [ ] or [ ] of Slope, then adjust the HPF or LPF slope.
Adjustable slope: FLAT, -6 dB/oct., -12 dB/oct., -18 dB/oct.,
-24 dB/oct.
5
Repeat steps 3 to 4 to make adjustment to the other
bands.
•
•
While adjusting the X-Over, you should consider the frequency
response of the connected speakers.
About the 2.2ch (3WAY)/4.2ch (FRONT/REAR/SUBW.) system
You can switch the system mode with the 2.2ch (3WAY)/4.2ch
(FRONT/REAR/SUBW.) switch on the PXA-H100. For details, refer
to the Owner’s Manual of PXA-H100.
Adjusting the Level
Touch [ ] or [ ] of Level, then adjust the HPF or LPF level.
Adjustable output level: -12 to 0 dB.
5
Repeat steps 3 to 4 to make adjustment to the other
bands.
2.2ch (3WAY) System
Storing Settings in the Memory
2.2ch (3WAY) System / (L+R)
Adjustment or setting contents of X-Over, Time Correction and P/G-EQ
can be stored.
Contents that can be stored vary depends on the audio processor used.
Setting contents:
Low / Mid-L / Mid-H / High
2.2ch (3WAY) System / (L/R)
1
2
Check whether the Defeat mode is off.
Setting contents:
Low-L / Low-R / Mid-L-L / Mid-L-R / Mid-H-L /
Mid-H-R / High-L / High-R
Touch [MEMORY] on the A.PROCESSOR list
display.
4
Adjust the crossover to your preference.
3
Within 5 seconds, touch any one of the preset
buttons [P.SET 1] through [P.SET 6] on the
A.Processor list screen.
Selecting the Cut-Off Frequency
Touch [ ] or [ ] of Freq., then select the cut-off frequency
(crossover point).
The setting contents are stored.
•
•
The stored contents will not be deleted even when the battery power
cord is detached.
This operation cannot be performed when a typical equalizer setting
The adjustable bandwidth differs depending on the speaker
(channel).
2.2ch (3WAY) System
Setting contents:
Low / Mid-L
Mid-H
High
20 Hz~200 Hz
20 Hz~20 kHz
(1 kHz~20 kHz)* /(20 Hz~20 kHz)*
Calling up the Preset Memory
1
2
1
1
2
Check whether the Defeat mode is off.
2
Touch any one of the preset buttons [P.SET 1]
through [P.SET 6] on the A.Processor list display to
select the preset memory.
•
It takes a few moments to call up the preset memory.
74-EN
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Time Correction Value List
About Time Correction
Time
Difference
(ms)
Time
Difference
(ms)
Delay
Number
Distance Distance
Delay
Number
Distance Distance
(cm)
(inch)
(cm)
(inch)
The distance between the listener and the speakers in a car vary widely
due to the complex speaker placement. This difference in the distances
from the speakers to the listener creates a shift in the sounds image and
frequency characteristics. This is caused by the time delay between the
sound reaching the listener’s right versus the left ear.
To correct this, this unit is able to delay the audio signal to the speakers
closest to the listener. This effectively creates a perception of increased
distance for those speakers. The listener can be placed at an equal
distance between the left and right speakers for optimum staging.
The adjustment will be made for each speaker in 3.4cm steps.
0
0.0
0.1
0.2
0.3
0.4
0.5
0.6
0.7
0.8
0.9
1.0
1.1
1.2
1.3
1.4
1.5
1.6
1.7
1.8
1.9
2.0
2.1
2.2
2.3
2.4
2.5
2.6
2.7
2.8
2.9
3.0
3.1
3.2
3.3
3.4
3.5
3.6
3.7
3.8
3.9
4.0
4.1
4.2
4.3
4.4
4.5
4.6
4.7
4.8
4.9
5.0
0.0
3.4
0.0
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
60
61
62
63
64
65
66
67
68
69
70
71
72
73
74
75
76
77
78
79
80
81
82
83
84
85
86
87
88
89
90
91
92
93
94
95
96
97
98
99
5.1
5.2
5.3
5.4
5.5
5.6
5.7
5.8
5.9
6.0
6.1
6.2
6.3
6.4
6.5
6.6
6.7
6.8
6.9
7.0
7.1
7.2
7.3
7.4
7.5
7.6
7.7
7.8
7.9
8.0
8.1
8.2
8.3
8.4
8.5
8.6
8.7
8.8
8.9
9.0
9.1
9.2
9.3
9.4
9.5
9.6
9.7
9.8
9.9
173.4
176.8
180.2
183.6
187.0
190.4
193.8
197.2
200.6
204.0
207.4
210.8
214.2
217.6
221.0
224.4
227.8
231.2
234.6
238.0
241.4
244.8
248.2
251.6
255.0
258.4
261.8
265.2
268.6
272.0
275.4
278.8
282.2
285.6
289.0
292.4
295.8
299.2
302.6
306.0
309.4
312.8
316.2
319.6
323.0
326.4
329.8
333.2
336.6
68.3
69.7
1
1.3
2
6.8
2.7
71.0
3
10.2
4.0
72.4
4
13.6
5.4
73.7
5
17.0
6.7
75.0
6
20.4
8.0
76.4
7
23.8
9.4
77.7
Example 1. Listening Position: Front Left Seat
8
27.2
10.7
12.1
13.4
14.7
16.1
17.4
18.8
20.1
21.4
22.8
24.1
25.5
26.8
28.1
29.5
30.8
32.2
33.5
34.8
36.2
37.5
38.9
40.2
41.5
42.9
44.2
45.6
46.9
48.2
49.6
50.9
52.3
53.6
54.9
56.3
57.6
59.0
60.3
61.6
63.0
64.3
65.7
67.0
79.1
Adjust the time correction level of the front left speaker to a high value
and the rear right to zero or a low value.
9
30.6
80.4
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
34.0
81.7
37.4
83.1
40.8
84.4
44.2
85.8
47.6
87.1
51.0
88.4
54.4
89.8
5.1ms
57.8
91.1
0.5m
61.2
92.5
2.25m
64.6
93.8
68.0
95.1
71.4
96.5
74.8
97.8
78.2
99.2
81.6
100.5
101.8
103.2
104.5
105.9
107.2
108.5
109.9
111.2
112.6
113.9
115.2
116.6
117.9
119.3
120.6
121.9
123.3
124.6
126.0
127.3
128.6
130.0
131.3
132.7
85.0
The sound is not balanced because the distance between the
listening position and the various speakers is different.
The difference in distance between the front left speaker and the rear
right speaker is 1.75 m (68-7/8").
Here we calculate the time correction value for the front left speaker
in the diagram on the above.
88.4
91.8
95.2
98.6
Conditions:
102.0
105.4
108.8
112.2
115.6
119.0
122.4
125.8
129.2
132.6
136.0
139.4
142.8
146.2
149.6
153.0
156.4
159.8
163.2
166.6
170.0
Farthest Speaker – listening position: 2.25 m (88-9/16")
Front left speaker – listening position: 0.5 m (19-11/16")
Calculation: L = 2.25 m – 0.5 m = 1.75 m (68-7/8")
Time correction = 1.75 ÷ 343* × 1,000 = 5.1 (ms)
* Speed of sound: 343 m/s (765 mph) at 20 °C
In other words, giving the front left speaker a time correction value of
5.1 ms makes it seem as if its distance from the listener is the same
as the distance to the farthest speaker.
Time correction eliminates the differences in the time required for the
sound to reach the listening position.
The time of the front left speaker is corrected by 5.1 ms so that its
sound reaches the listening position at the same time as the sound of
other speakers.
Example 2. Listening Position: All Seats
Adjust the time correction level of each speaker to almost the same level.
1
2
Sit in the listening position (driver’s seat, etc.) and
measure the distance (in meters) between your head
and the various speakers.
Calculate the difference between the distance
correction value to the farthest speaker and the
other speakers.
L = (distance to farthest speaker) –
(distance to other speakers)
These values are the time correction values for the different
speakers. Setting these values to make each sound reach the
listening position at the same time as the sound of other speakers.
75-EN
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
About the Crossover
Low range Mid range High range
Crossover (X-Over):
This unit is equipped with an active crossover. The crossover limits the
frequencies delivered to the outputs. Each channel is controlled
independently. Thus, each speaker pair can be driven by the frequencies
for which they have been optimally designed.
(Different from actual display)
The crossover adjusts the HPF (high pass filter) or LPF (low pass filter)
of each band, and also the slope (how fast the filter rolls off the highs or
lows).
Adjustments should be made according to the reproduction
characteristics of the speakers. Depending on the speakers, a passive
network may not be necessary. If you are unsure about this point, please
consult your authorized Alpine dealer.
Level adjusting
(0 to -12 dB)
Output frequency range
Slope FLAT
Slope adjusting
4.2ch (FRONT/REAR/SUBW.) mode
20 Hz
(Different from actual display)
HPF cut-off LPF cut-off
frequency frequency
Cut-off frequency
Slope
(1/3 octave steps)
Level
HPF
LPF
HPF
LPF
FLAT, 6,
12, 18,
20 Hz -
200 Hz
0 to
-12 dB
•
•
HPF (high pass filter): Cuts the lower frequencies and allows the
higher frequencies to pass.
LPF (low pass filter): Cuts the higher frequencies and allows the
lower frequencies to pass.
Low range
speaker
----
----
24 dB/oct.
FLAT, 6,
12, 18,
24 dB/oct.
FLAT, 6,
12, 18,
Rear high
range
speaker
20 Hz -
200 Hz
0 to
-12 dB
----
----
----
----
•
•
•
•
Slope: The level change (in dB) for a frequency change of one octave.
The higher the slope value, the steeper the slope becomes.
Adjust the slope to FLAT to bypass the HP or LP filters.
Do not use a tweeter without the HPF on or set to a low frequency, as
it may cause damage to the speaker due to the low frequency content.
You cannot adjust the crossover frequency higher than the HPF or
lower than the LPF.
Adjustment should be made according to the recommended crossover
frequency of the connected speakers. Determine the recommended
crossover frequency of the speakers. Adjusting to a frequency range
outside that recommended may cause damage to the speakers.
For the recommended crossover frequencies of Alpine speakers, refer
to the respective Owner’s Manual.
Front high
range
speaker
20 Hz -
200 Hz
0 to
-12 dB
24 dB/oct.
•
•
Low range High range
We are not responsible for damage or malfunction of speakers caused
by using the crossover outside the recommended value.
(Different from actual display)
2.2ch (3WAY) mode
Cut-off frequency
Slope
(1/3 octave steps)
Level
HPF
LPF
HPF
LPF
FLAT, 6,
12, 18,
24 dB/oct.
FLAT, 6,
12, 18,
Low
range
speaker
20 Hz -
200 Hz
0 to
-12 dB
----
----
FLAT, 6,
12, 18,
20 Hz - 20 Hz -
200 Hz 20 kHz
0 to
-12 dB
Mid range
speaker
24 dB/oct. 24 dB/oct.
1 kHz -
20 kHz,
(20 Hz ~
20 kHz)*
FLAT*
6, 12, 18,
24 dB/oct.
High
range
speaker
0 to
-12 dB
----
----
76-EN
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Adjustment Procedure for Dolby
Surround
External Audio Processor
Operation (Optional)
Make the adjustments described below in order to reproduce Dolby
Digital and DTS sound with greater accuracy.
A compatible, external audio processor is operable from this unit when
connected. Some audio processors may require a wired controller. The
explanations below use the PXA-H700/PXA-H701 as an example.
Refer to the operating instructions of the audio processor for more
details.
Adjustment procedure
(Turning the speakers to be used on and off and
1
•
•
The adjustments or settings performed on the connected audio
processor cannot be operated properly from this unit.
setting their response)
The setting “Setting the Speakers”, “Setting Bass Sound Control”,
and “Graphic Equalizer Adjustments” are not available if the MRA-
D550 is connected. Additionally, if the MRA-F350 is connected, the
following setting “Setting the MX mode” is not available. Also, the
setting content differs between the PXA-H700 and PXA-H701.
This unit cannot be connected to the PXA-H510 and PXA-H900.
•
(Adjusting the signal output level to the various
2
To display the Audio processor Setup Menu screen:
Your vehicle must be parked with the ignition key in the ACC or
ON position. To do this, follow the procedure below.
speakers)
1 Bring your vehicle to a complete stop at a safe
location. Engage the parking brake.
2 Keep pushing the foot brake and release the parking
brake once then engage it again.
3 When the parking brake is engaged for the second
time, release the foot brake.
Mixing bass sound to the rear channel
(Achieving smooth sound in the rear seat by mixing
the front audio signals with the rear speaker signals)
3
•
For automatic transmission vehicles, place the transmission lever
in the Park position.
Now, the locking system for the Audio processor mode operation
has been released. Engaging the parking brake can reactivate
the Audio processor Setup Menu, as long as the car’s ignition has
not been turned off. It is not necessary to repeat the above
procedure (1 through 3) of “To display the Audio processor mode
screen.”
Adjusting the acoustic image (page 81)
(Adjusting the acoustic image to achieve a sound as
if the center speaker were directly in front of the
listener)
4
Each time the ignition is turned OFF, perform the procedure of “To
display the Audio processor mode screen.”
Achieving powerful high volume sound
(Achieving energetic sound with even greater power,
5
like the sound in a movie theater)
Adjusting the DVD Level (page 82)
(Adjust the volume (signal level) in the Dolby Digital,
6
Pro Logic II, DTS and PCM modes.)
Storing Settings in the Memory (page 82)
(Storing all the settings and adjustments made on the
INA-W910 (not only the above settings/adjusts) in the
memory)
7
In case of combining the Automatic adjustments, etc.
We recommend to make the Automatic adjustments before the Dolby
Surround adjustments.
77-EN
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MX Tuner (OFF, Tuner MX 1 to 3 )
The medium to high frequencies become more clear, and
produces well balanced sound in all the bands.
Setting the External Audio Processor
MX DVD (OFF, Movie MX 1 to 2)
The dialogue portion of the video is reproduced more clearly.
(DVD Music)
This disc contains a large quantity of data such as music clip.
MX uses this data to reproduce the sound accurately.
Following Steps 1 to 5 describe the common procedures for
operating the Audio Processor setting function. For details of
the setting function items, refer to descriptions of respective
items.
MX AUX (OFF, CMPM MX, Movie MX, Music MX)
Choose the MX mode (CMPM, Music, or Movie) that
corresponds to the media connected.
1
touch [ ] on the main screen.
The SETUP selection screen is displayed.
•
•
•
The contents of MX set here is reflected to PXA-H700 or PXA-H701.
When OFF is selected, MX effect of each MX mode will be OFF.
Each music source, such as CD, and MP3 can have its own MX
setting.
There is no MX mode for AM radio.
MX CMPM is applied for MP3/WMA/AAC, Pandora Radio and
iPod/iPhone.
2
3
4
Touch [
] of Audio Setup.
The Audio Setup screen appears.
•
•
Touch [
] of A.Processor.
The A.Processor list screen appears.
•
•
•
MX Tuner is applied for HD Radio and RBDS reception.
MX SXM is applied for SiriusXM reception.
The MX setting can be performed only when a source is currently
selected.
Touch [ ], [ ] or the title bar of the desired item to
change its setting.
•
This function is inoperable when Defeat is set to ON.
Setting items:
Media Xpander / Bass Sound Cont. / Dolby PLII / Rear Fill /
Setting Bass Sound Control
X-Over / Time Correction / Phase / G-EQ / P-EQ / Speaker Select /
Multi Ch Setup / Speaker Setup / DVD Level / PCM Mode
Setting item: Bass Sound Cont.
5
Touch [
] to return to the previous screen.
Setting Bass Compressor
You can adjust the sound of low frequencies as desired.
Set MX Mode of the External Audio
Processor
Touch [ ] or [ ] of Bass Comp. to select the desired
mode.
Bass sound is emphasized more as the mode is sequentially
Before performing the operations below, set MX (Media Xpander)
mode of the PXA-H700 to “AUTO” when the PXA-H700 is connected.
switched as Mode 1
frequencies.
2
3, offering you vivid low
Setting item: Media Xpander
Select OFF when the setting is not necessary.
1
2
Select ON or OFF of MX by touching [ ] or [ ] of
Media Xpander.
Setting Bass Focus
Using the previously specified delay number (time difference)
allows you to set a time difference between the front-rear/left-
right speakers. Namely, it enables a time correction based on
your preference. With an initial delay of 0.05 ms for each of the 0
to 400 steps, audible time correction can be achieved.
OFF: Turns off the MX effect of every music source.
ON: Turns on the specified MX mode.
Touch the title bar of Media Xpander after setting to
ON.
The Media Xpander setup screen appears.
Set the delay number in the front and rear, and on the
right and left of the desired speaker by touching the
respective [ ] or [ ] button.
3
•
Touch [ ] or [ ] of the desired MX mode.
Music source (such as CDs, iPod) level can be set.
•
MX CD (OFF, CD MX 1 to 3)
CD mode processes a large quantity of data. This data is used
to reproduce the sound cleanly by making use of the data
quantity.
MX CMPM (OFF, CMPM MX 1 to 3) / MX SXM (OFF, SXM MX 1 to 3)
This corrects information that was omitted at the time of
compression. This reproduces a well-balanced sound close to
the original.
78-EN
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4
Adjust the crossover to your preference.
Using the Pro Logic II Mode
Selecting the Cut-Off Frequency
Pro Logic processing can be conducted on the music signals recorded
on two channels to achieve Dolby Pro Logic II surround sound. For
two-channel Dolby Digital and DTS signals, there is also a “Rear Fill”
function for outputting the signals of the front channel to the rear
channel.
Touch [ ] or [ ] of Freq., then select the cut-off frequency
(crossover point).
The adjustable bandwidth differs depending on the speaker
(channel).
Adjusting the Level
Setting items: Dolby PLII / Rear Fill
Touch [ ] or [ ] of Level, then adjust the HPF or LPF level.
Touch [ ] or [ ] of Dolby PLII / Rear to select the
desired mode.
Adjusting the Slope
PL II Movie: Suits the stereo TV shows and all programs
encoded in Dolby Surround. It improves the
sound field directivity to near that of discrete
5.1-channel sound.
Touch [ ] or [ ] of Slope, then adjust the HPF or LPF slope.
•
•
•
•
When the speaker is set to the “OFF” mode, the X-Over for that
Check the playback frequencies of the connected speakers before
adjusting.
In order to protect the speakers, there is no OFF setting for the
subwoofer low pass filter (the slope remains the same).
The HPF cannot be set Slope to OFF if Tweeter (TW) is selected for
Front1. Or, only the subwoofer is adjustable if Stereo is selected for
the subwoofer.
PL II Music: Can be used for all stereo music recordings, and
provides a wide, deep sound field.
OFF:
Turns Dolby PL II function to OFF.
If PL II Music is selected, the center width can be adjusted with
following operations.
This function offers the optimum vocal position by adjusting the
center channel position between the center speaker and the L/R
acoustic image (Bi-Phantom)” (page 81) are ineffective while
this function is activated.)
Performing Time Correction Manually
(Time Correction)
Touch [ ] or [ ] of Center Width Cont. to adjust
the level.
Because of the particular conditions inside the vehicle, there can be
major differences in the distances between the various speakers and the
listening position. It is possible to calculate the optimum correction
values and eliminate the time error at the listening position yourself
using this function.
The level can be adjusted between 0 to +7. When the level
increases, the center channel position moves from the
center speaker position to both sides.
Touch [Off] of Center Width Cont. to turn off the center width
control.
Setting item: Time Correction
•
•
This adjustment is effective when the setting of the center speaker is
“Rear Fill” function:
1
2
Sit in the listening position (the driver’s seat, for
example) and measure the distance (in meters)
between your head and the various speakers.
Depending on the input signals, the sound may only be output from
the front speakers. In this case, the “Rear Fill” function can be used
to output signals from the rear speakers as well.
Avoid stopping, pausing, switching the disc, cueing, fast-forwarding
or switching the audio channel of this unit while making this
adjustment. The setting is canceled if the Decode mode is switched.
This adjustment is ineffective when the speaker is set Center to OFF
This function only works with two-channel signals. This operation is
ineffective when 5.1-channel DTS or Dolby Digital signals are input.
If the setting of Rear Fill is made when Rear Mix is ON, sound is
unchanged in the Rear Fill setting because Rear Mix is given priority
during 2 channel decoder other than linear PCM.
Calculate the difference in distance between the
farthest speaker and the other speakers.
•
L = (distance of farthest speaker) –
(distance of other speakers)
•
•
•
3
Divide the distances calculated for the different
speakers by the speed of sound (343 m/s
temperature 20 °C).
This value is the time correction value for the various
speakers.
•
For linear PCM signals, the voice is output from the rear speaker
regardless of the Rear Fill and Rear Mix setting.
X-OVER Adjustment
Setting item: X-Over
1
Touch [ ] or [ ] of X-Over to select L+R or L/R.
L+R:
Sets the same adjustment values for the left and
right channels.
L/R:
Different adjustment values can be set for the left
and right channels.
2
3
Touch the title bar of X-Over.
A speaker list on the X-Over screen is displayed.
Touch the title bar of the speaker to be adjusted.
The screen changes to the X-Over screen to be adjusted.
79-EN
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Concrete examples
Phase Switching
Calculating the time correction value for the front left speaker on
the diagram below.
Setting item: Phase
Conditions:
Distance between farthest speaker and listening position:
2.25 m (88-3/4")
Distance between front left speaker and listening position:
0.5 m (20")
Switch the phase (0° or 180°) by touching [ ] or [ ] of
the desired speaker.
Graphic Equalizer Adjustments
Calculation:
L = 2.25 m (88-3/4") – 0.5 m (20")= 1.75 m (68-3/4")
Compensation time = 1.75 ÷ 343 x 1000 = 5.1 (ms)
The graphic equalizer allows you to modify the sound using 31 bands
each for the front (left and right), rear (left and right) and center
speakers. An additional 10 bands are available for the subwoofer. This
allows you to customize the sound to suit your taste.
In other words, setting the time correction value for the front left
speaker to 5.1 (ms) sets a virtual distance matching the
distance to the farthest speaker.
Setting item: G-EQ
1
Select L+R or L/R by touching [ ] or [ ] of G-EQ.
L+R: Sets the same adjustment values for the left and right
channels.
L/R: Different adjustment values can be set for the left and
right channels.
5.1ms
When parametric EQ is adjusted, this setting will be turned
off.
0.5m
2.25m
2
3
4
Touch the title bar of G-EQ.
The G-EQ list screen appears.
Touch the title bar of the desired speaker (channel).
The G-EQ adjustment screen appears.
The sound is uneven because
the distance between the
listening position and the
different speakers is different.
The difference in the distance
between the front left and rear
right speakers is 1.75 meters
(68-3/4").
Time correction eliminates
the difference between the
time required for the sound
from the different speakers to
reach the listening position.
Setting the time correction of
the front left speaker to 5.1
ms makes it possible to
coordinate the distance from
the listening position to the
speaker.
Adjust the G-EQ to your preference.
Adjusting the Level
Touch [ ] or [ ] of the desired frequency to adjust the
level.
•
•
When the speaker is set to the “OFF” mode, the graphic equalizer
for that speaker cannot be set. Refer to “Setting the Speakers”
Check the playable frequency ranges of the connected speakers
before making the equalizer adjustments. If the speaker’s playable
frequency range is 55 Hz to 30 kHz, for example, adjusting the 40 Hz
or 20 Hz band has no effect. Additionally, you may overload and
damage the speakers.
4
Touch [ ] or [ ] of Time Correction.
Select L+R or L/R.
•
When Graphic EQ is adjusted, the adjustment for Parametric EQ
becomes ineffective.
L+R: Sets the same adjustment values for the left and right
channels.
L/R: Different adjustment values can be set for the left and
Parametric Equalizer Adjustments
right channels.
The frequency bands of the graphic equalizer are fixed. This makes it
very difficult to correct for undesired peaks and dips at specific
frequencies. The parametric equalizer’s center frequency can be tuned
to these specific frequencies. Then, the bandwidth (Q) and level are
fine-tuned, independently, to make the necessary corrections. The
parametric equalizer function is an advanced tool for serious
audiophiles.
5
6
Touch the title bar of Time Correction.
The Time Correction adjustment screen appears.
Adjust the time correction value (0.00 ~ 20.00ms) of a
desired speaker by touching the respective [ ] or
[
] button (1 step = 0.05ms).
•
•
When the speaker is set to the “OFF” mode, the TCR for that
The adjustment value for Front2 (Speakers) which is adjusted in time
correction, is also applied to the front speakers in “Setting Bass
Setting item: P-EQ
1
Select L+R or L/R by touching [ ] or [ ] of P-EQ.
L+R: Sets the same adjustment values for the left and right
•
The adjustment (AUTO TCR) cannot be automatically set on this
unit.
channels.
L/R: Different adjustment values can be set for the left and
right channels.
When Graphic EQ is adjusted, this setting will be turned off.
80-EN
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2
3
4
Touch the title bar of P-EQ.
The P-EQ list screen appears.
Setting of Dolby Digital
Setting item: Multi Ch Setup
Touch the title bar of the desired speaker (channel).
The P-EQ adjustment screen appears.
Adjusting the acoustic image (Bi-Phantom)
In most installations, the center speaker must be placed directly
between the front passenger and driver. Using this function, the
center channel information is distributed to the left and right
speakers. This creates an acoustic image simulating a center
speaker directly in front of each listener. Adjusting the center
width in PL II Music (see “Using the Pro Logic II Mode” on
page 79), makes this function ineffective.
Adjust the P-EQ to your preference.
Selecting the Band
Touch [ ] or [ ] of Band to select the desired band.
Adjusting the Frequency
Touch [ ] or [ ] of Freq. to adjust the frequency of the
selected band.
•
Avoid stopping, pausing, switching the disc, cueing, fast-forwarding
or switching the audio channel of this unit while making this
adjustment. The setting is canceled if the Decode mode is switched.
Adjusting the Level
Touch [ ] or [ ] of Level to adjust the level of the selected
band.
Touch [ ] or [ ] of Bi-Phantom to adjust the level.
The level can be adjusted within the range of -5 to +5. The higher the
level, the more the position of the center speaker is shifted to the
sides.
Setting the Bandwidth
The Bi-Phantom function is turned off by touching [Off].
Touch [ ] or [ ] of Q to select the bandwidth.
•
•
This adjustment is effective when the setting of the center speaker to
Small or Large in the speaker setup settings.
This adjustment is ineffective when the speaker is set Center to OFF
•
When the speaker is set to the “OFF” mode, the parametric
equalizer for that speaker cannot be set. Refer to “Setting the
It is not possible to adjust the frequencies of adjacent bands within 7
steps.
Check the playable frequency ranges of the connected speakers
before making the equalizer adjustments. If the speaker’s playable
frequency range is 55 Hz to 30 kHz, for example, adjusting the 40 Hz
or 20 Hz band has no effect. Additionally, you may overload and
damage the speakers.
•
•
Mixing bass sound to the rear channel (Rear Mix)
This function mixes the front channel audio signals to the audio
signals output from the rear speakers, improving the sound in
the vehicle’s rear seat.
•
Avoid stopping, pausing, switching the disc, cueing, fast-forwarding
or switching the audio channel of this unit while making this
adjustment. The setting is canceled if the Decode mode is switched.
•
When the Parametric EQ is adjusted, the adjustment for Graphic EQ
becomes ineffective.
Touch [ ] or [ ] of Rear Mix to adjust the level.
Setting the Speakers
The level can adjusted in five steps: -6, -3, 0, +3 and +6. The higher
the level, the more bass is output from the rear speakers. (The effect
differs according to the software (DVD, etc.).)
Setting item: Speaker Select
The Rear Mix function is turned off by touching [Off].
Set the connected speaker by touching the respective
•
•
This adjustment is ineffective when the rear speaker setup setting is
set to “OFF”.
For linear PCM signals, the voice is output from the rear speaker
regardless of the Rear Fill and Rear Mix setting.
[
] or [ ] button.
Front1: OFF/Full (Full Range)/TW (Tweeter)
Front2: OFF/ON
Rear:
OFF/ON
Center: OFF/ON
Achieving powerful high volume sound (Listening Mode)
Subw.:
OFF/Mono/Stereo
With Dolby Digital, the dynamic range is compressed so that
powerful sound can be achieved at regular volume levels. This
compression can be canceled to achieve an energetic sound
with even greater power, like the sound in a movie theater. This
function works only in the Dolby Digital mode.
•
•
Set the speaker which is not connected to OFF.
Settings above can be carried out even when the speaker is set to
To use the subwoofer in Mono with PXA-H700 or PXA-H701
connected, connect the subwoofer to the subwoofer output terminal
of PXA-H700 or PXA-H701.
•
Touch [ ] or [ ] of Listening Mode to select STD or
MAX.
STD:
For powerful sound at regular volume levels
For powerful sound at high volumes
MAX.:
•
Keep the volume to a level at which sounds outside the vehicle can
still be heard.
81-EN
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Adjusting the speaker levels (Output Level)
Adjusting the DVD Level
The test tones help to make the volume adjustments of the
different speakers. When levels are equal, a strong sense of
presence can be heard from the different speakers at the
listening position.
The volume (signal level) for Dolby Digital, Dolby PL II, DTS and
PCM modes can be set.
•
Avoid stopping, pausing, switching the disc, cueing, fast-forwarding
or switching the audio channel of this unit while making this
adjustment. The setting is canceled if the Decode mode is switched.
•
Avoid stopping, pausing, switching the disc, cueing, fast-forwarding
or switching the audio channel of this unit while making this
adjustment. The setting is canceled if the decode mode is switched.
Setting item: DVD Level
1 Touch [On] of Output Level.
Test tone output is repeated for each of the different speaker
channels. They will be repeated in the order shown below.
If no operation is performed for 2 seconds, the channel
switches to the next channel.
Adjust the level by touching [ ] or [ ] of the desired
adjusting mode.
Linear PCM Setting
Left
Center
Right
Left
Right Surround
Left Surround
The output when playing discs recorded in linear PCM can be set to 2 or
3 channels.
2 While the test tone is being produced from the speakers,
touch [ ] or [ ] of Output Level balance the output from all
the speakers.
Setting item: PCM Mode
•
•
The adjustment range for the different speakers is -10 dB ~ +10 dB.
Adjust based on the front speakers.
Touch [ ] or [ ] of PCM Mode to select 2CH or 3CH.
3 Touch [On] again to turn off.
2CH: 2ch output (L/R)
3CH: 3ch output (L/R/CENTER)
•
If a speaker is set to off mode, that speaker’s level adjustment cannot
•
This adjustment is ineffective when the speaker is set Center to OFF
Speaker Setup
The PXA-H700 or PXA-H701 can be set according to the playable
frequency range of your speakers.
Storing Settings in the Memory
Check the playable frequency range of the speakers (not including the
subwoofer) before performing this operation to verify whether the
speakers can play low frequencies (of about 80 Hz or less).
Adjustment or setting contents can be stored.
Contents that can be stored vary depends on the audio processor used.
1
2
Touch [MEMORY] on the A.Processor list display.
•
Avoid stopping, pausing, switching the disc, cueing, fast-forwarding
or switching the audio channel of this unit while making this
adjustment. The setting is canceled if Decode mode is switched.
Within 5 seconds, touch any one of the preset
buttons [P.SET 1] through [P.SET 6] on the
A.Processor list screen.
Setting item: Speaker Setup
The setting contents are stored.
Select the speaker characteristic by touching [ ], [
]
of the desired speaker setting.
•
The stored contents will not be deleted even when the battery power
cord is detached.
1
OFF* :
When no speaker is connected.
Small:
When a speaker that cannot play low frequencies
(80 Hz or less) is connected.
2
Calling up the Preset Memory
Large* : When a speaker that can play low frequencies
(80 Hz or less) is connected.
1
* It is not possible to set the front speakers to “OFF”.
* If the front speakers are set to “Small”, the rear and center speakers
cannot be set to “Large”.
Touch any one of the preset buttons [P.SET 1] through
[P.SET 6] on the A.Processor list display to select the
preset memory.
2
•
•
The subwoofer can be set only to ON/OFF.
•
It takes a few moments to call up the preset memory.
If the center speaker is turned “OFF”, the center channel’s audio
signals are added to the audio signals output from the front speakers.
If you set the speaker response to “OFF”, also set the speaker setting
Perform the setup for all the speakers (“Front”, “Center” ,“Rear”
and “Subwoofer”). If not, the sound may not be balanced.
When center is set to “OFF”, the setting is ineffective even if center
is set with this function.
•
•
•
•
Through changing the settings on each speaker, a change in the
output of the other speakers may occur due to the setting
requirements.
•
When using the PRO Logic II, if the rear speaker is set to “Large”,
then there will be no output from the subwoofer.
82-EN
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
How to connect to a BLUETOOTH
compatible device (Pairing)
BLUETOOTH
Operation
For details on the control from a BLUETOOTH compatible device,
refer to the Owner’s Manual of the BLUETOOTH compatible device.
•
BT Audio source is not available with this unit.
1
Set a BLUETOOTH connection from a BLUETOOTH
compatible device.
2
3
The PIN code (“0000”) is displayed on the unit.
Setup Before Using
Input the PIN code (“0000”) in a BLUETOOTH
compatible device.
About BLUETOOTH
4
If this unit is successfully connected to a
BLUETOOTH compatible device, “Connected/
(Device name)” is displayed, and then the unit
returns to normal mode.
BLUETOOTH is a wireless technology allowing communication
between a mobile device or personal computer over short distances.
This enables a hands-free call or data transmission between
BLUETOOTH compatible devices. BLUETOOTH transmission is
available in the unlicensed 2.4 GHz spectrum if the distance between
devices is within 10 meters. For details, refer to the BLUETOOTH
Home page (http://www.bluetooth.com).
•
enable this unit to recognize a mobile phone. For mobile phone
passkey (passcode) input operation, refer to the mobile’s Owner’s
Manual. Additionally, the mobile phone can be searched directly
from this unit. Refer to “Registering the BLUETOOTH Device”
If a BLUETOOTH compatible device is successfully connected, the
next time when the ignition key of the car is turned to on, the unit will
automatically connect to the previously connected device. However,
the connection may fail. If the auto connection fails, try the
connection manually.
•
•
Depending on the BLUETOOTH version, a BLUETOOTH
compatible device may not be able to communicate with this unit.
Proper function of this unit with all BLUETOOTH compatible
devices is not guaranteed. For handling of the BT compatible device,
consult your ALPINE dealer or ALPINE website.
Depending on the surroundings, BLUETOOTH wireless connection
may be unstable.
•
•
•
•
When you place a call, or perform setup operations, be sure to stop
your car in a safe place.
Depending on the connected BLUETOOTH compatible device(s), the
function may differ. Also refer to the Owner’s Manual of the
connected device(s).
BLUETOOTH Setup
BLUETOOTH Setup Operation
Before Using Hands-Free Function
The following steps 1 to 6 are common to the various BLUETOOTH
functions. For details, refer to each individual function.
Before using a hands-free phone function, the following setting need to
be made.
•
•
While calling, BLUETOOTH Setup operation cannot be performed.
BLUETOOTH Setup operation.
•
Before using a hands-free phone, it must be paired with this unit.
1
2
3
Press SOURCE/ on the unit.
The SOURCE selection screen is displayed.
Touch [ ] on the main source screen.
The Setup Select screen is displayed.
Touch [
] of Source Setup.
The Source Setup screen appears.
4
5
Touch [
] of BLUETOOTH Setup.
The BLUETOOTH Setup screen appears.
Touch [ ], [ ] or [
change its setting.
] of the desired item to
Setting items:
Paired Devices / Device Search / Clear Device /
Service Provider / Visible Mode / Auto Answer / Speaker Select /
MIC Input / Firmware Version / Firmware Update / Echo Cancel /
Navi Voice IN Call / Shortcut Memory
6
Touch [
previous screen.
] on the left side of screen to return to the
Touch [Exit] to return to the main source screen that was
displayed before the setup operation was started.
83-EN
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Setting the BLUETOOTH Device
Displaying the phone service provider name
Setting item: Service Provider
Select one of 5 connected BLUETOOTH compatible devices that you
previously registered.
The service provider name of the connected BLUETOOTH compatible
device will be displayed. If a BLUETOOTH compatible device is not
connected, “ID Unsent” will be displayed.
Setting item: Paired Devices
Touch a BLUETOOTH compatible device to use (change
connection) from the Paired Device list.
•
Depending on the character type some phone service provider name
cannot be displayed.
•
If the connection is successfully changed, “Connected NO./(Device
name)” is displayed for 2 seconds, and then the display returns to the
Setup screen.
Setting the Search Mode
You can set whether this unit can be recognized or not from a
BLUETOOTH compatible device. Normally set this to Visible Mode
ON.
•
•
If you input the wrong passcode or communications fail, “Failed” is
displayed.
If you want to connect another BLUETOOTH compatible device,
after disconnecting the current BLUETOOTH compatible device,
connect the BLUETOOTH compatible device you want to change to.
The registration number 5 is deleted when you set ignition from ACC
to OFF. If all the 5 positions have been registered, you cannot
register the 6th device. To register another device, you need to delete
one of the devices from position 1 to 5 first.
Setting item: Visible Mode
ON:
Enables recognition of this unit from the
BLUETOOTH compatible device.
•
OFF:
Disables recognition of this unit from the
BLUETOOTH compatible device.
•
Depending on the mobile phone, it may be necessary to input a
passcode. For inputting the mobile phone’s passcode, refer to the
mobile phone’s Owner’s Manual.
Registering the BLUETOOTH Device
The BLUETOOTH device is used when a connectable BLUETOOTH
compatible device is searched and connected from this unit, or a new
BLUETOOTH compatible device is registered.
Setting the Received Calls automatically (Auto Answer)
When a call is received, you can set whether to receive it automatically
or not.
Setting item: Device Search
1
2
3
When Device Search is selected, “Now Searching” is
displayed, and searching starts.
Setting item: Auto Answer
ON:
When a call is received, it will be taken
automatically after about 5 seconds.
Touch the device name to be connected from the
Device Search list.
OFF:
When a call is received, it will not be
received automatically. If a message is
displayed and [
received, you can receive the call.
] is touched when a call is
If this unit is successfully connected to a
BLUETOOTH compatible device, a paired device
name and a registered number (No. 1 to 5) are
displayed, and then the unit returns to normal mode.
•
If the received call setting on the mobile phone is on, the call will be
answered automatically even though this setting is set to OFF.
•
If a mobile phone is registered for the first time:
Selecting the output speaker
Input a passcode when the numeric keypad screen is displayed, then
input the same passcode in the BLUETOOTH compatible device to
make the pairing. After the pairing is completed, the unit will
automatically connect to the BLUETOOTH compatible device.
If you input the wrong passcode or communications fail, “Failed” is
displayed.
A passcode input on the unit is maximum 4-digit. If a passcode on the
BLUETOOTH compatible device exceeds 4 digits, reset the passcode
and make this setting again.
You can select the connected speaker in car to output the sound signal of
telephone.
Setting item: Speaker Select
•
•
All:
The sound be output from all of speakers in car.
F-L:
The sound only be output from the front left
speaker.
F-R:
The sound only be output from the front right
speaker.
F-LR:
The sound be output from the front left and front
right speaker.
Deleting a BLUETOOTH Device from the list
You can delete the history of a previously connected BLUETOOTH
compatible device.
•
•
The setting cannot be adjusted during a phone call. Adjust the setting
before placing a call.
When an IMPRINT audio processor (PXA-H100) or External Audio
Processor (PXA-H701, etc.) is connected, the default setting All will
be set and cannot be adjusted.
Setting item: Clear Device
1
Touch the BLUETOOTH compatible device you want
to delete from the Clear Device list.
A message is displayed.
2
•
•
Touch [Yes] if you want to delete.
Touching [No] will cancel the setting.
The registration number 5 is deleted once the ignition key goes from
ACC to off.
84-EN
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Adjusting the volume for the microphone input
Hands-Free Phone Control
You can emphasize or weaken the microphone input volume level.
Setting item: MIC Input
Touch [ ] or [ ] to select the desired volume level (0 ~ 7).
About the Hands-Free Phone
•
•
The setting cannot be adjusted during a phone call. Adjust the setting
before placing a call.
The setting can be adjusted only when the BLUETOOTH compatible
device is connected.
Hands-free calls are possible when using a HSP (Head Set Profile) and
HFP (Hands-Free Profile) compatible mobile phone with this unit.
•
Avoid performing a hands-free call in heavy traffic or on narrow or
winding streets.
Displaying the firmware version
Setting item: Firmware Version
The current firmware version of this unit will be displayed.
•
•
Close the windows while calling to reduce background noise.
If both calling parties are using hands-free devices, or the call is
made in a noisy location, difficulty hearing the other person’s voice
is normal.
•
•
•
Depending on telephone line conditions or certain mobile devices
used, voices may sound unnatural.
When using a microphone, speak as directly as you can into the
microphone to pick up the best sound quality.
Certain mobile phone features are dependent on the capabilities and
settings of your service provider’s network. Additionally, certain
features may not be activated by your service provider, and/or the
provider’s network settings may limit the feature’s functionality.
Always contact your service provider about feature availability and
functionality.
Updating the firmware
Setting item: Firmware Update
Future BLUETOOTH firmware update of this unit (for phone
compatibility) at customer end will be available for this unit.
For information to update your BLUETOOTH firmware, please visit
Alpine America home page (http://www.alpine-usa.com).
Turning the Echo Cancel ON or OFF
Setting item: Echo Cancel
All features, functionality, and other product specifications, as well
as the information contained in the Owner’s Manual are based upon
the latest available information and are believed to be accurate at
the time of printing.
Alpine reserves the right to change or modify any information or
specifications without notice or obligation.
The echo of hands-free phone will be avoided correspondingly by
setting the Echo Cancel to ON.
Receving Navigation Voice while calling
Setting item: Navi Voice IN Call
The voice guidance of the navigation system will be mixed with the call
by setting the Navi Voice IN Call to ON.
Answering a Call
Deleting the stored shortcut memory
You can delete the stored shortcut memory telephone number by using
here.
Incoming calls are announced by the received call ring tone and a
displayed message (Caller name/PHONE No.).
Setting item: Shortcut Memory
Touch [ ].
Touch [Delete] of preset 1 ~ 5 to delete the shortcut memory.
The call starts.
•
About how to store the telephone number as a shortcut dial, refer to
•
Indicator
(Signal Strength):
While calling, the indicator will display the current signal strength of
mobile phone. While in the mode other than Calling, the unit cannot
read the signal strength of the mobile phone exactly. In this case, the
indicator displays the signal strength of last call.
•
•
(page 84) is set to ON, you can receive a call automatically.
While calling, the source sound on the unit is muted.
After calling, playback will resume.
85-EN
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Hanging up the Telephone
Call History
Call History is recorded for the last dialed/received/missed calls. There
are various ways of making calls based on the “Call History”. The
following steps 1 to 3 are common to the various ways of making these
calls. For details, refer to each individual category for making calls.
Touch [ ].
The call finishes.
Adjusting the volume when receiving a
Call
1
Press and hold MUTE/PHONE for at least 2
seconds.
The Telephone Menu screen is displayed.
While calling, you can adjust the volume. The adjusted volume level is
stored.
2
Touch [
] of the desired item to place the call.
Setting items:
Dialed Calls / Received Calls / Missed Calls / Phone Book /
Voice Dial / Dial Input
Press
/
on the unit to adjust the volume.
•
You may need to increase volume from your regular audio listening
source level. However, increasing the volume excessively may result
in feedback. If feedback is noticed as feedback is directly related to
the volume, turn down the volume as low as acceptable to eliminate
it. Positioning the microphone in a direction away from the main car
speakers (e.g. clipped on sun visor) may also reduce feedback at high
volume.
•
The unit will update the information in the Call History
automatically each time a mobile phone is connected or receiving/
dialing a call. At this time, if you select any outgoing mode, “Now
Updating” will be displayed.
It may take some time for the list to be displayed, and also directly
after connection, the list may not be brought up to date.
•
3
Touch [
] to return to the previous screen.
Touch [Exit] to return to the main source screen that was
displayed before the setup operation was started.
Redial Function
•
If you place a call directly from the paired mobile phone, the phone
number is not displayed, you cannot redial from the unit in this case.
You can redial the person you have previously called.
After finishing a call, touch [ ] on the screen within
5 seconds.
The telephone is redialed.
Redialing a Number in Dialed Calls History
Previously dialed telephone numbers are stored in dialed calls history.
You can redial a number by searching from dialed calls history.
Call Switching Operation
Setting item: Dialed Calls
While making a call, this function allows you to initiate the transfer of
the audio between the mobile phone and the speakers in the car.
Touch [Call] of the person name or the telephone
number you want to call from the Dialed Calls list.
The call is placed.
While calling, touch [
] to switch the call sound
between the unit and mobile phone.
•
Depending on the mobile phone, this operation may not be
performed.
86-EN
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Touch [Call] of the person name or the telephone
number you want to call from the Phone Book list.
The call is placed.
Dialing a Number in Received Calls History
Telephone numbers from received calls are stored in the received calls
history. You can redial these numbers by searching here.
•
If one name has several numbers registered in the telephone book,
choose and touch the title of the desired number after touching [
of the name, the telephone will be called. Touch [Call] of the name
]
Setting item: Received Calls
directly, the default number of the name will be called. Depending on
the connected mobile phone, this function may not be performed.
If a name cannot be obtained via the phone book, only the telephone
number (default number) is displayed. If both name and number
cannot be obtained, “ID Unsent” will be displayed.
If the call history or phonebook of the mobile phone is added or
deleted while it is connected to the unit, the list displayed on the unit
may not be brought up to date. If it is not updated, you cannot
correctly place a call.
Touch [Call] of the person name or the telephone
number you want to call from the Received Calls list.
The call is placed.
•
•
Dialing a Number in Missed Calls History
Telephone numbers for received calls that are missed, are stored in the
missed calls history. You can redial these numbers by searching here.
Setting item: Missed Calls
Voice Dial Operation
Touch [Call] of the person name or the telephone
number you want to call from the Missed Calls list.
The call is placed.
You can call the telephone by performing voice operation.
Setting item: Voice Dial
1
2
Touch [
A message is displayed.
] of Voice Dial.
Dialing a Number In the Phone Book
(Phone Book)
Touch [Yes] to activate the voice dial mode.
The voice dial mode is activated, and “Speak” is displayed.
Up to 1,000 telephone numbers are downloadable to the BLUETOOTH
compatible unit from a mobile phone. Dial a call by selecting a person
from the phone book list.
•
Touch [No] will return to the Telephone Menu screen.
3
Say the telephone number*, name* you want to call
into the microphone.
Setting item: Phone Book
Display example for Phone Book screen
* The number and name depend on the voice dial information stored in
the mobile phone.
•
•
If the voice dial fails, the unit will return to normal mode in 30
seconds.
You can perform this operation only when a voice dial compatible
mobile phone is connected. If the mobile phone is not compatible
with the voice dial, “No Support” is displayed for 2 seconds.
The Voice Dial function performance depends on the recognition
range of the mobile phone and mounting location of the microphone.
Note when the microphone is mounted.
•
•
Voice dial operation depends on the function of the mobile phone.
For details, refer to the Owner’s Manual of the mobile phone.
Scroll the list one line at a time by touching [ ] or [ ].
Scroll the list one page at a time by touching [ ] or [ ].
The Alphabet Search mode is activated. Refer to “Phone
87-EN
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Dialing a Number Using Direct Dial Input
The Second Incoming Call
You can place a call by inputting the telephone number directly by the
numeric keypad screen on the unit.
While calling, a second incoming call is announced by the received call
ring tone and a display message.
Setting item: Dial Input
Display example for receiving the Second Incoming Call Screen
1
Touch [ ] to display the item of Dial Input.
Display example for the Dial Input screen
2
The numeric keypad screen is displayed. Touch
(input) the telephone number, and then touch [Call].
The call is placed.
Answer the second incoming call while the first call is
waiting. The call waiting mode is activated. Refer to
Hang up the first call and the second incoming call is
answered.
Hang up the second incoming call.
•
About the numeric keypad
: closes the numeric keypad input screen.
Delete All: deletes all input numbers.
: deletes a previous number.
Call Waiting Function
Phone Book Alphabet Searching Function
The Call Waiting Function allows you to answer an incoming call
during a current call, and freely switch between the two. When a second
call is received, the current call is placed on hold. When you are finished
with one call, the call can switch to the other automatically.
Using this function, you can search the names registered in the phone
book more efficiently.
1
Touch [ALPHABET] on the Phone Book screen.
The Alphabet Search screen is displayed.
Display example for call waiting mode screen
Display example for the Alphabet Search screen
Display the current calling caller (1 or 2).
Switch the call between caller 1 and caller 2.
Touching [
] to return to the previous screen.
Touching [Exit] will change to the main source screen.
The alphabetic character keypad screen.
2
3
Touch the initial letter or number of the name one
wishes to search.
The phone book screen of the alphabet you selected is
displayed.
Touch [Call] of person name or the telephone
number you want to call.
The call is placed.
88-EN
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Storing the Preset Dialing Number
Auxiliary Device
(Optional)
Numbers that you dial frequently can be stored into a preset list for
quick recall. Five numbers can be assigned as the preset dialing
numbers. After setting, you can dial these numbers directly. About how
1
Touch [
screen.
] of the desired name on the Phone Book
Operating Auxiliary Devices (Optional)
The stored numbers of the selected name is listed.
To operate your devices connected to the AUX terminals on the rear
panel of INA-W910 (AUX1 mode) or to the iPod (V)/AUX Input
Connector by using an optional AV/RCA interface cable (4-pole mini
AV plug to 3-RCA) (AUX2 mode), follow the procedures described
below.
Display example for the number list screen
WARNING
It is dangerous (and illegal in many states) for the
driver to watch the Video while driving the vehicle.
The driver may be distracted from looking ahead and
an accident could occur.
Install the INA-W910 correctly so that the driver
cannot watch Video unless the vehicle is stopped and
the emergency brake is applied.
2
Touch the [Preset] of the number you want to
assign as a preset dialing number.
If the INA-W910 is not installed correctly, the driver
will be able to watch the Video while driving the
vehicle and may be distracted from looking ahead and
cause an accident. The driver or other people could
be severely injured.
A message will display to show you the preset NO. (1~ 5) of
the assigned number.
•
If all the 5 positions have been used, you cannot assign the 6th
number. To assign another number, you need to delete one of the
preset number from position 1 to 5 first. About how to delete the
To activate your auxiliary devices:
Your vehicle must be parked with the ignition key in the ACC or
ON position. To do this, follow the procedure below.
Dialing the preset number
1 Bring your vehicle to a complete stop at a safe
location. Engage the parking brake.
2 Keep pushing the foot brake and release the parking
brake once then engage it again.
Display example for Telephone Menu screen
3 When the parking brake is engaged for the second
time, release the foot brake.
•
For automatic transmission vehicles, place the transmission lever
in the Park position.
Now, the locking system for the AUX mode operation has been
released. Engaging the parking brake can reactivate the AUX
mode, as long as the car’s ignition has not been turned off. It is
not necessary to repeat the above procedure (1 through 3), of
“To activate your auxiliary devices”.
Each time the ignition is turned OFF, perform the procedure of “To
activate your auxiliary devices”.
Touch any one of the preset buttons [P.SET 1] through
[P.SET 5] that has a number stored to it on the
Telephone Menu screen.
•
If you try to activate the auxiliary device while driving, the display
will show the warning-Picture off for your safety.
The stored preset number is dialed directly.
89-EN
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
1
2
3
Press SOURCE/ on the unit.
The SOURCE selection screen is displayed.
Camera Operation
(Optional)
Touch [AUX1]* or [AUX2].
The external input screen is displayed.
Touch [NTSC/PAL] to change the video input type.
When an optional camera is connected, the view video of camera can be
output to the monitor.
Mode” on page 67 is displayed.
Topview camera, Front camera or Rear camera can be connected to this
unit.
Depending on your camera, please choose the connection method
(Direct or RCA) and camera type (Topview, Front or Rear) first. For
For the information of the Alpine camera, refer to the table below.
.
•
•
•
If the AUX1 mode is not displayed on the main menu, set AUX1 IN to
If the AUX2 source is not displayed on the main menu, set AUX2 IN
The display mode changes by touching [WIDE] for AUX mode.
Direct Camera
RCA Camera
Front
Rear
HCE-C200F
—
HCE-C300R*1
HCE-C117D
HCE-C200R
HCE-C115
2
Front camera*
When the HCE-C200F is connected, conditions in front of the
vehicle, such as a poor-visibility road, can be determined.
2
Rear camera*
If an HCE-C300R/HCE-C200R/HCE-C117D/HCE-C115 series
camera is connected, when the vehicle is reversed, the rear
camera view (guide marks for vehicle width and available
distance) is displayed automatically on the screen of this unit.
1
* When connecting to HCE-C300R, calibration must be performed.
HCE-C300R” (page 124) and “Calibration” in the owner’s manual
of HCE-C300R.
2
* A commodity camera (with RCA video output) can also be connected
to the Camera Video Input connector as the front or rear camera.
90-EN
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Display the rear view video while the car is
in reverse
Front camera Operation
1
Shift the gear lever to the reverse (R) position.
The rear view image is displayed while the car remains in
reverse.
Display the front view video manually
1
2
3
4
Press SOURCE/ on the unit.
The SOURCE selection screen is displayed.
2
3
Touch any area of the screen to display the view
change function keys.*
3
Touch
(CAMERA).
The Camera mode is activated and view video is displayed.
Touch [Back], [Panorama], [Corner] or [Top] to
choose the view angle.
Touch any area of the screen to display the view
change function keys.
[Back]:
Rear View
[Panorama]:
[Corner]:
[Top]:
Panorama View
Corner View
Ground View
Touch [Panorama], [Corner] or [Top] to choose
the view angle.
Touch [
], the view change function keys will disappear.
[Panorama]:
[Corner]:
[Top]:
Panorama View
Corner View
Ground View
4
Touch [Guide On] or [Guide Off] to set whether the
rear camera guide line* is displayed.
4
Touch [
], the view change function keys will disappear.
3
* Displays only when the rear camera with view change function is
* Displays only on the Back view screen of rear camera.
•
For more information, please refer to the owner’s manual of
connected front camera.
4
•
Be sure to also check behind the car visually. Use the camera image
to assist in showing conditions behind the car.
Rear camera Operation
•
•
This function is effective when the reverse wire is properly connected.
For more information, please refer to the owner’s manual of
connected rear camera.
Display the rear view video manually
Adjusting Alarm Volume (HCE-C300R only)
1
2
3
4
Press SOURCE/ on the unit.
The SOURCE selection screen is displayed.
This operation can be performed only when the gear lever is in the
reverse position (R).
Touch
(CAMERA).
The Camera mode is activated and view video is displayed.
1
2
3
Touch any area of the screen to display the view
change function keys.
Touch any area of the screen to display the view
3
change function keys.*
Touch [Back] for three times.
The volume adjustment screen appears.
Touch [Back], [Panorama], [Corner] or [Top] to
choose the view angle.
[Back]:
Rear View
Touch [Panorama] to switch a desired Volume
Level.
[Panorama]:
[Corner]:
[Top]:
Panorama View
Corner View
Ground View
Display example for volume adjustment screen
5
Touch [Guide On] or [Guide Off] to set whether the
rear camera guide line* is displayed.
4
Touch [
], the view change function keys will disappear.
Touching the button toggles the volume level.
4
Touch [
] to return to normal mode.
91-EN
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Adjusting Detection Sensitivity
(HCE-C300R only)
Changer
(Optional)
This operation can be performed only when the gear lever is in the
reverse position (R).
1
2
3
4
Touch any area of the screen to display the view
change function keys.
Controlling CD Changer (Optional)
An optional 6-disc or 12-disc CD Changer may be connected to the
INA-W910 if it is Ai-NET compatible. With a CD Changer connected
to the Ai-NET input of the INA-W910, the CD Changer will be
controllable from the INA-W910.
If you connect a changer compatible with MP3, you can play
CD-ROMs, CD-Rs, and CD-RWs containing MP3 files on the
INA-W910.
Touch [Back] for three times.
The volume adjustment screen appears.
Touch [Back] again.
The sensitivity adjustment screen appears.
Touch [Panorama] to switch a desired detection
sensitivity level.
Using the KCA-410C (Versatile Link Terminal) multiple changers can
be controlled by the INA-W910.
Display example for sensitivity adjustment screen
See the Multi-Changer Selection section for selecting the CD Changers
1
2
Press SOURCE/ on the unit.
The SOURCE selection screen is displayed.
Touch [CD CHG.].
The display changes to the CD changer mode screen.
When a 6 Disc CD Changer is connected;
1 Touch [P1/2]*.
Touching the button toggles the volume level.
The Function Guide display appears.
* When an MP3 compatible CD changer or DVD changer is
connected, touch repeatedly until the disc number is
displayed.
Low:
Detects mainly moving objects.
Almost no motionless objects are
detected.
Detects moving objects and motionless
objects.
2 Touch any one of the select buttons [DISC 1] through
[DISC 6].
DISC 1 through DISC 6 select the discs from the first disc
to 6th disc.
High:
When an MP3 compatible CD changer is connected;
1 Touch [P1/3] twice to change the Function Guide display.
2 Touch any one of the select buttons [DISC 1] through
[DISC 6].
5
Touch [
] to return to normal mode.
DISC 1 through DISC 6 select the discs from the first disc
to 6th disc.
When a 12-Disc CD Changer is connected;
You can select the disc numbers 1 to 6 in the same manner as
for 6-disc Changer.
Touch [P1/3] twice to select disc numbers 7 to 12.
The function guide display changes so that DISC 7
through DISC 12 represent disc numbers 7 to 12.
•
•
•
After selecting the desired disc, you can operate in the same way as
for the CD player. For details, see the CD/MP3/WMA/AAC section.
When an MP3 compatible CD changer is connected, the unit can
play discs containing both audio data and MP3 data.
The DVD changer (optional) is controllable from the INA-W910 as
well as the CD changer.
92-EN
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Multi-Changer Selection (Optional)
SiriusXM Satellite
Radio Operation
(Optional)
When using KCA-410C (Versatile Link Terminal), you can connect two
changers.
1
In changer mode, touch [CHG SEL] or press BAND
on the remote control (sold separately) to select the
next changer.
SiriusXM Tuner operation:
2
To operate the selected changer, see “CD/MP3/WMA/
AAC” section.
When an optional SiriusXM Tuner is connected to this unit,
the following operations may be performed.
•
Display example for SiriusXM main screen
[Tag] button: Stores the tag information. For details, refer
Receiving Channels with the SiriusXM
Tuner (Optional)
About SiriusXM Satellite Radio
Everything worth listening to is on SiriusXM, getting over 130
channels, including the most commercial-free music, plus the best
sports, news, talk and entertainment. A SiriusXM Tuner and
Subscription are required. For more information, visit
www.siriusxm.com.
•
The SiriusXM Satellite Radio controls on this unit are available only
when a SiriusXM Tuner is connected.
1
Press SOURCE/ on the unit.
The SOURCE selection screen is displayed.
2
Touch the [SiriusXM].
The SiriusXM main screen display appears.
•
The SiriusXM source selection icon may be on the second page of
source options. Press the
[
]
button to access the second page. See
•
The SiriusXM source selection icon will not be listed if the SiriusXM
Tuner is not connected properly. Check the tuner connections if the icon
is not shown.
3
•
Touch [ ] or [ ] to select the desired channel.
Touching and holding either button will rapidly
browse through the channels.
Refer to the SiriusXM Tuner User Guide for details on how to install the
SiriusXM Tuner.
93-EN
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Tuning Channels by Category
Checking the SiriusXM Radio ID Number
Channels are grouped into categories based on the type of content heard
on the channels.
To subscribe to the SiriusXM Satellite Radio service, it is necessary to
locate and identify the Radio ID of your SiriusXM Tuner. The Radio ID
contains 8 characters and can be found on the bottom of your SiriusXM
Tuner or can be displayed on when selecting Channel 0 by following the
steps below:
1
Touch CATEGORY [ ] or [ ] on the SiriusXM main
screen to activate the category browsing mode.
The channels within the category of the current channel are
listed.
1
While receiving SiriusXM Radio, touch [ ] or [ ] to
select channel “0”.
Display example of category browsing mode screen
The unit displays the ID number.
2
To cancel the ID number display, change the channel
other than “0”.
•
The SiriusXM Radio ID does not contain the letters I, O, S, or F.
Storing Channel Presets
You can store 18 of your favorite SiriusXM channels for easy recall
with Preset buttons.
The preset buttons are located on page 3 of the Function Guide
Touching the [INFO.] button changes the display of
information for the channels in the category with the
following three options.
1
2
If necessary, touch the Function Guide page button
[P X/3] to select Page 3 [P 3/3].
The Preset (P.SET) buttons are displayed.
Channel NO./Channel Name
Channel NO./Artist Name
Channel NO./Song Title
Channel NO./Channel Name
Touch [BAND] to select the desired band you want
to store the preset in.
2
Touch CATEGORY [ ] or [ ] on the category
browsing mode screen to select a desired category.
The Category Name is shown at the top of the display.
There are 3 Satellite Radio Preset bands. Each touch of
[BAND] changes the band:
SiriusXM-1
SiriusXM-2
SiriusXM-3
SiriusXM-1
3
Touch [ ] next to the channel number to select that
channel.
3
4
Tune to the desired favorite channel and then touch
and hold any one of the preset buttons [P.SET 1]
through [P.SET 6] for at least 2 seconds.
The selected channel is stored.
•
If no operation is performed for 10 seconds, the category browsing
mode is canceled.
Repeat the procedure to store up to 5 other channels
onto the same band.
Changing the Display
To use this procedure for other bands, simply select the
desired band and repeat the procedure.
A total of 18 channels can be stored in the preset memory
(6 channels for each band; SiriusXM-1, SiriusXM-2 and
SiriusXM-3.)
Text information, such as the channel name, artist name/feature, and
song/program title, is available with SiriusXM or channel. The unit can
display this text information as explained below.
Touch [INFO.] in SiriusXM mode.
Each time you touch this button, the display changes as shown
below.
•
If you store a new channel into a preset which already has a channel
assigned, the current channel will be cleared and replaced with the
new one.
Artist name
Title name
Content info
Category name
Channel name
Artist name
Title name
94-EN
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Searching by My Music
1 Touch [ ] of My Music* after step 1.
The artist names and song names that you have stored and
Tuning Channels using Presets
are currently playing will be displayed in a list.
2 Touch [ ] of the desired artist/song.
The channel of the selected artist/song being broadcast is
received.
1
If necessary, touch the Function Guide page button
[P X/3] to select Page 3 [P 3/3].
The Preset (P.SET) buttons are displayed.
* Displayed only when the stored song or artist is broadcasting.
2
Touch the [BAND] button to select the band
containing your desired channel preset.
The Band number is shown at the top of the display
(SiriusXM-1, SiriusXM-2, or SiriusXM-3).
•
Touch [INFO.] on the channel name search screen, the information
of the broadcasting channels will be displayed. You can choose the
desired channel from the artist name list or song name list.
Each time you touch the [INFO.] button, the display changes
as below.
3
Touch any one of the preset buttons [P.SET 1]
through [P.SET 6] that has your desired Satellite
Radio channel stored in memory.
Channel name
Channel name
Artist name
Song name
Searching by My Games
1 Touch [ ] of My Games* after step 2.
Search Function
The sport teams that you have stored and the game is
currently broadcasting will be displayed in a list.
2 Touch [ ] of the desired team.
The channel of the selected game being broadcast is
received.
1
2
Touch [P1/3].
The Function Guide is switched.
In the SiriusXM mode, touch [ ] on page 2 of the
Function Guide.
Category search screen is displayed.
* Displayed only when the game of stored team is broadcasting.
•
Touch [INFO.] on the channel name search screen, the information
of the broadcasting channels will be displayed. You can choose the
desired channel from the league name list or team name list.
3
Touch [
] of the desired category.
The channel name search screen of the selected category
is displayed.
Each time you touch the [INFO.] button, the display changes
as below.
Channel name
Channel name
4
•
Touch [ ] to receive the selected channel.
League name
Team name
You can change the category directly by touching CATEGORY [
or [ ] on the channel name search screen.
]
Searching by Channel
1 Touch [ ] of All Channels after step 1.
All Channels will be displayed in a list.
2 Touch [ ] to receive the selected channel.
Storing your favorite Artist/Song for
Alerts
You can directly select the channel number on the display of the
numeric keypad.
•
Touch [INFO.] on the channel name search screen, the information
of the broadcasting channels will be displayed. You can choose the
desired channel from the artist name list or song name list.
1
2
If necessary, Touch the Function Guide page button
[P X/3] to select Page 1 [P 1/3].
Each time you touch the [INFO.] button, the display changes
as below.
Touch [10KEY].
The numeric keypad input screen is displayed.
Channel name
Channel name
Artist name
Song name
3
4
Touch to input the channel number.
Touch [Enter].
The selected channel is received.
•
If no operation is performed for 2 seconds after inputting the number,
the channel will be received automatically.
95-EN
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Storing the desired Song/Artist
Replay Function
While listening to SiriusXM Satellite Radio, you can be alerted when
your favorite songs or artists are playing on other channels. An
interruption ALERT will be displayed when a matching artist or song is
found on another channel. For receiving interruption ALERT
information, refer to “Activating the stored Alert” below.
In SiriusXM mode, you can pause, rewind and replay up to 30 minutes
of live Satellite Radio.
1
2
If necessary, Touch the Function Guide page button
[P X/3] to select Page 2 [P 2/3].
The Instant Replay buttons are shown on the Function
Guide.
1
2
Touch [MEMORY] on the SiriusXM mode screen.
The Memory type selection screen is displayed.
Touch [
/
] to Pause playing of the channel
content.
Touch [
] of Store Song or Store Artist to select
The “
(Pause)” icon and replay progress bar is
the store type.
displayed.
A “Song (Artist) Saved X Used/Y Empty” pop up screen is
displayed.
3
Touch [
The “
commences.
/
] again to resume playing the content.
X is the total number of song titles, artist names or sports
team stored in memory, and Y is the total number of memory
song titles, artist names or sports team still available for
storage.
(Play)” icon lights up and offset playback
•
The time difference between the real broadcasting time and the offset
playback time is displayed.
•
“Art/Sng Unavailable” appears on the display if both the artist and
song is not available to be stored.
“Artist (Song) Unavailable” is displayed if the artist (song) is not
available to be stored.
4
Touch the [ ] button to exit Instant Relay and listen
to live content.
“Artist (Song) Already Saved” is displayed if this Artist (Song) was
previously stored.
If there is no memory space, “Memory Full” is displayed and then
you are asked if you want to replace a stored item. If you select
•
To fast reverse, touch and hold [
] and to fast forward, touch
and hold [
Touching [
].
] or [
•
•
•
•
] will move a track up/down.
If you change channels while in Replay mode, the contents of the
replay buffer are emptied.
Contents older than 30 minutes are automatically emptied from the
replay buffer.
“Yes”, then the list to stored alert items are displayed. Touch [
]
of the item that you want to replace.
•
If [MEMORY] is touched and held for at least 2 seconds, the display
changes to the Alert list screen. You can manage the stored songs and
artist individually. Refer to “Setting the Alert individually for a Song/
Parental Lock Function
This function can help restrict the listening of channels to children of
appropriate age levels only. For information on setting the Parental
When a locked channel is selected, “Channel Locked” is displayed and
then the numeric keypad appears for you to enter the passcode.
Receiving and Tuning to an Alert
Whenever a stored sports team, artist, or song is playing on another
channel, an interruption ALERT appears on the unit display. To tune to
the game, artist or song identified by the alert, follow the steps below:
Input the 4-digit passcode you set in “Setting the
The initial number is 0000.
1
When stored information is broadcast, after
displaying “Song Alert”, “Artist Alert” or “Game
1
Alert”, the screen changes to My Music list* or My
•
•
If you input a wrong passcode, “Incorrect Lock Code” is displayed.
After entering the correct passcode, you can access all locked
channels without entering the passcode again until the unit is
powered off and then back on.
2
Game list* display.
2
Touch [ ] of the channel on the list you want to
receive.
The display changes to the selected channel and the
channel is received.
•
•
If [
] is touched, return to the previous screen.
If no operation is performed for 5 seconds, or [Exit] is touched, the
screen returns to the normal mode screen.
1
* Only for Song Alert and Artist Alert.
2
* Only for Game Alert.
96-EN
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Using Jump Memory and Jump Recall
function
Flash Memory/
Portable audio
player (Optional)
The Jump Channel is a special channel that you can jump to with the
press of a dedicated button and then jump back to the previous channel.
This channel is often used to select your favorite SiriusXM traffic and
weather report channel.
1
To store the Jump channel in memory, first tune to
the channel that you wish to store and then touch
the Function Guide page button to select page 2
[P 2/3]. Then touch and hold the [JUMP] button for
at least 2 seconds.
A Flash memory or Portable audio player can be connected to the
INA-W910 through the USB Connector of this unit.
If a Flash memory device or Portable audio player is connected to the
unit, MP3/WMA/AAC files of Flash memory and MP3/WMA files of
Portable audio player can be played back.
2
Touch [JUMP] to recall and tune to the saved Jump
channel.
Saved Jump channel can also be recalled by pressing and
holding MAP, even in modes other than SiriusXM mode.
BANK Function (Tag search mode only)
•
•
Pressing and holding MAP again for at least 2 seconds will jump
back to the previous mode or SiriusXM channel.
Only one channel can be stored as the jump source channel. When
you want to store a new channel, the old channel will be cleared and
the new one will be memorized.
When a Flash Memory is connected, the following description is
available only when Tag is set in “Setting the USB Search mode” on
What is a Bank?
A bank is a unit of up to 1,000 songs, which is stored in
memory/Portable audio player. “Banking” refers to the
grouping of songs available in Flash Memory/Portable audio
player, in banks of 1,000 songs each. However, when a
Flash Memory is connected, 1 BANK can store up to 1,000
songs under the following conditions. Otherwise, the
number of songs that can be stored may be less than 1,000.
Conditions (general estimate values)
Storing iTunes Tagging information
iTunes Tagging lets you tag songs heard on SiriusXM channels. Using
this unit in conjunction with an optional SiriusXM Tuner and a Tagging
compatible iPod/iPhone, you can tag the music that you listen to, then
transfer the tag information to your iPod/iPhone, and later, when your
iPod/iPhone is connected to iTunes, you can preview, buy and download
your tagged songs. For details, refer to the Owner’s Manual of the
Tagging compatible iPod/iPhone.
Playlists: 20 (32 characters; 64 bytes)
Genres: 10 (32 characters; 64 bytes)
Composers: 30 (32 characters; 64 bytes)
Artists: 30 (32 characters; 64 bytes)
Albums: 100 (32 characters; 64 bytes)
Titles: 1,000 (32 characters; 64 bytes)
Folders: 100 (32 characters; 64 bytes)
Files: 1,000 (32 characters; 64 bytes)
File Paths: 1,000 (128 characters; 256 bytes)
When a desired song is heard on a SiriusXM channel, if there is tag
information of the song, the [Tag] button will light.
Touch [Tag] to save its tag information.
If no iPod/iPhone is connected, “Tag Count X” is displayed (X is
the total amount of the tag information stored in this unit).
About Banking
While a bank is being built up, “Banking” is displayed. If
another bank is selected when unit power is turned on, the
ACC position is set, or USB connection is made, banking
will start.
It can take anywhere from a few seconds to up to 10
minutes for banking to complete. This depends on the
number of files and folders in Flash memory/Portable audio
player.
•
During tagging, the iPod/iPhone takes priority to save the tag
information. If no iPod/iPhone is connected, the tag information is
saved to this unit.
When the memory of iPod/iPhone is full, “iPod Memory Full, Tag
Count X” is displayed. The tag information will be stored to the unit.
If the tagging operation is interrupted by a hands-free phone call, the
tagging operation will be canceled and the unit will display
“Cannot Tag”.
•
•
•
This unit can store up to 50 pieces of tag information. When the
memory of the unit is full, “Tuner Memory Full. Connect iPod” may
be displayed.
When an iPod that doesn’t support the tagging function is connected,
“Non-Tagging iPod” may be displayed.
Available operations while Banking
•
Search functions, such as album search or tag
information (artist display, etc.) are available during the
banking process. However, during such time, tag
information display changes.
•
•
•
When the iPod/iPhone is disconnected from the unit during tagging,
its tag information will be stored in the unit.
•
•
Regular fast-forwarding and next song selection is
available.
During Banking, the played back song order may differ
from the song order in Flash memory/Portable audio
player.
If there is stored tag information on the unit, when an iPod/iPhone
supporting the tag function is connected, the stored tag information
will be transferred to the iPod/iPhone automatically. When the iPod/
iPhone memory becomes full, “iPod Memory Full” will be displayed,
and any remaining tag information on the unit will not be transferred
to the iPod/iPhone.
•
If tag information already exists, “Already Tagged” will be displayed
when you try to tag information again.
97-EN
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Order of files while Banking
Files are divided in different Banks according to the time
and hierarchy they are stored into the Flash memory, up to
1,000 files for each Bank.
Playback
1
2
Press SOURCE/ on the unit.
The SOURCE selection screen is displayed.
The order of the files is as follows:
The files in the hierarchy 1 are divided first and the files in
other hierarchies are divided according to the time when its
superior directory folder in hierarchy 1 is stored.
Touch [USB Audio].
The USB mode is activated and the display changes to the
USB screen.
Hierarchy 1
Hierarchy 2
3
Touch [
(file).
] or [
] to select the desired track
Flash Memory
Hierarchy 3
Returning to the beginning of the current track (file):
Touch [
].
Fast backward:
Touch and hold [
].
Advancing to the beginning of the next track (file):
Touch [
].
Fast forward:
Touch and hold [
].
4
To pause playback, touch [
/
].
Touching [ ] again will resume playback.
/
•
WMA format files that are protected by DRM (Digital Rights
Management), AAC format files that have been purchased from
iTunes Music Store and files that are copy-protected (copyright
protection) cannot be played back on this unit.
The playback time may not be correctly displayed when a VBR
(Variable Bit Rate) recorded file is played back.
If there is tag information, artist name/album name/track name is
displayed.
Folder
MP3/WMA/AAC File
•
•
•
•
If some file or folder is deleted in the Flash memory, new file or
folder stored into the Flash memory may take the place of the
deleted one in some cases.
ID3 tag/WMA tag
This unit has the BANK function that automatically divides every 1,000
songs stored in Flash memory/Portable audio player into individual
banks to make searching and playing back a song easier. A maximum of
1,000 songs for one bank can be stored according to the order stored in
Flash memory/Portable audio player. A maximum of 20 banks (20,000
songs) can be recognized. BANK1 (songs 1 to 1,000) is set as the
default. If you want to search beyond 1,000 songs, perform the
following operation to select a different bank.
If an MP3/WMA/AAC file contains ID3 tag/WMA tag information,
the ID3 tag/WMA tag information is displayed (e.g., song name,
artist name, and album name). All other tag data is ignored.
“No Support” is scroll displayed when text information is not
compatible with this unit.
•
•
Before disconnecting Flash memory, be sure to change to another
source or set to pause.
BANK No.
BANK1
Song number
1~1,000
BANK2
1,001~2,000
BANK20
19,001~20,000
1
2
Touch [P1/2] to change the function guide.
Touch BANK [ ] or [ ] to select the desired
BANK.
Each operation can be performed in the selected bank.
•
Even if the files are contained in the same folder, they may be saved
as different BANK.
98-EN
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Repeat Play
Searching for a desired Song
Only Repeat One is available for this mode.
You can select to search a song by Tag information or Explorer (File
Name) mode for a Flash memory. Before you search a song, select your
Repeat One:
A single song is repeatedly played back.
Repeat Folder: Only files in a folder are repeatedly played back.
1
2
Touch [P1/2].
The function guide is displayed.
Searching by Tag information
Before performing the following procedures, make sure Tag is selected
Touch [ ].
The file will be played repeatedly.
A Flash memory or Portable audio player can contain hundreds of
songs. By using file tag information and keeping these songs organized
in playlists, this unit’s search functions will ease song searches.
Each music category has its own individual hierarchy. Use the Playlists/
Artists/Albums/Songs/Genres/Composers/Folders/Files search mode to
narrow searches based on the table below.
*
(off)
(Repeat One)
(Repeat Folder) (Rep eat the list being
played back)
3
To cancel repeat play, touch [ ].
Hierarchy 1
Hierarchy 2
Songs
Albums*
Songs
—
Hierarchy 3
Hierarchy 4
* Repeat Folder is available only for flash memory and make sure
“File Name” is set (refer to “Setting the USB Search mode” on
page 61).
1
Playlists*
—
Songs
—
—
—
Artists*
Albums*
Songs
—
•
You can switch the Band when “Tag” is set in “Setting the USB
Search mode” (page 61), if the Band is changed, the repeat play
mode will be canceled.
—
—
Genres*
Composers*
Folders
Artists*
Albums*
Files
Albums*
Songs
—
Songs
—
—
Random Play Shuffle (M.I.X.)
Files
—
—
—
1
The Shuffle function of the Flash memory or Portable audio player is
* Playlist search is not available when a Portable audio player is
connected.
displayed as
on the INA-W910.
For example: Searching by Artist name
1
Touch [ ] after touching [P1/2].
The songs will be played back in random sequence.
The following example explains how an Artists search is performed.
Another search mode can be used for the same operation, although the
hierarchy differs.
When a song is searched by Tag information
1
2
*
ALL*
(Shuffle ALL)
(off)
Searching by artist name
(Shuffle Songs)
When a folder/file is searched by Explorer (File Name)
mode (Flash Memory only)
1
Touch [
].
The search mode is activated, and the search list screen
appears.
3
4
*
ALL*
(Shuffle ALL)
(off)
(Shuffle folders)
•
Touching [
Touch [
] for at least 2 seconds will return to last search mode.
] of Artists.
2
2
To cancel M.I.X. play, touch [ ].
The Artists search screen is displayed.
1
* Song shuffle randomly plays back songs within a selected category
(playlist, album, etc.). The songs within the category are played just
once until all songs have been played.
* All songs in the current Bank are played back in random sequence.
Any one song does not play back again until all songs have been
played back.
3
Select the desired artist.
2
To play back the artist directly
Touch [ ] next to the artist’s name.
All songs of the selected artist are played back.
3
* All songs in the current folder are played back in random sequence.
Any one song does not play back again until all songs have been
played back.
* All songs in the Flash Memory are played back in random sequence.
To search for the album of an artist
4
1 Touch [
] of the selected artist.
Any one song does not play back again until all songs have been
played back.
The Albums search screen of the selected artist is displayed.
2 Touch [ ] next to the desired album’s name.
All songs of the selected album are played back.
•
When a song is played back during Random (M.I.X.) play, the song
can be played back again randomly even if not all songs on the Flash
Memory/Portable audio player have been played back.
99-EN
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To search for a song in the album of an artist
1 Touch [ ] of the desired album in “To search for the album
of an artist” in step 2.
The Songs search screen of the selected album is displayed.
2 Touch [ ] next to the desired song’s name.
The selected song is played back.
Selecting Playlist/Artist/Album/Genre/
Composer (Tag search mode only)
Playlist*/Artist/Album/Genre/Composer can be easily changed, when
Tag information search mode is selected (refer to “Setting the USB
For example, if you listen to a song from a selected album, the album
can be changed.
•
In the Tag search mode, a search can be made quickly by Alphabet
skip function to find the desired artist or song, etc. For details, refer
Touching [ ] of ALL will play back all songs in the list when you are
in a hierarchy with an asterisk “*” (see table on the previous page).
•
•
•
•
•
Touch [ ] or [ ] to select the desired
(Artist) / (Album) / (Genre) /
(Playlist) /
(Composer).
Touching [
] of ALL will display the search list in the next
hierarchy.
When search is made during M.I.X. play, the M.I.X. play mode will be
canceled.
Even if the songs belong to the same playlist, they may be saved as
different Bank.
In the search mode, you can scroll the list one page at a time by
touching [ ] or [ ].
* This item is invalid when a portable audio player is connected.
•
•
If search selection mode is not activated, a Song search is not possible.
If an album is selected from an artist search, the album can be
searched.
•
During shuffle (M.I.X.) playback, this operation is not possible.
Searching by Explorer (File Name) mode
(Flash Memory only)
Select the desired Folder
(Folder up/down)
Before performing the following procedures, make sure File Name is
A Flash Memory can contain hundreds of songs. By folder/file name
searching, you can quickly find desired folder/file. This operation is
similar to search a folder/file from PC.
If you listen to a file from a selected folder, the folder can be changed.
Touch
[
] or [ ] to select the folder.
•
•
During M.I.X. ALL playback, this operation is not possible.
When Folder up/down is made during M.I.X. Folder play, the M.I.X.
Folder play mode will be canceled.
1
2
Touch [
].
The search mode is activated, and the search list screen
appears.
Creating the playlist from the Artist/
Album information of the current song
(Tag search mode only)
Touch [
] to enter the selected folder or touch [
]
to play back the selected file.
Touch [ ] of the selected folder to play back all songs in
the folder.
3
Repeat step 2 until the desired folder/file is found
when a folder is entered.
When a song is played back, a playlist about all the songs with the same
Artist or Album stored in the Flash memory or Portable audio player
can be created.
•
When a Portable audio player is connected, even though File Name is
search mode will be applied.
By using the direct search bar, you can search for an album, song, etc.
1
2
Touch [P1/2] when a song is played back.
The function guide changes.
•
Touch [X-RPT ARTIST] or [X-RPT ALBUM] to
create the playlist.
•
•
This operation cannot be performed when “File Name” is set in
According to the artist/album information of the current song, a
playlist containing all the songs with the same artist/album (within
the same BANK) are made into a playlist. The playlist begins
playback immediately.
100-EN
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Alphabet Skip Function
(Tag search mode only)
iPod/iPhone
(Optional)
The search list is arranged in alphabetical order, and can be skipped to
the titles with the next alphabetical character such as from A to B, B to
C. You can skip in reverse order such as B to A by touching
ALPHABET [ ].
During Tag search mode, touch ALPHABET [ ] or [ ] to perform
the Alphabet Skip Function.
An iPod/iPhone can be connected to this unit, by using the USB
connection cable. When this unit is connected by using the cable, you
can choose to control the iPod/iPhone using its own controls or by this
unit controls. For details, refer to “Setting the iPod Control” on
•
Internet or telephone functions, etc. of the iPhone or iPod
touch are not controllable from the unit, but these functions
can be controlled using the iPhone or iPod touch itself.
If you connect an iPhone to this unit, it can be used as an
iPod.
To watch the video screen of the video file in the iPod
(iPhone, iPod touch, iPod classic, iPod 5th generation, 3rd,
4th and 5th generation iPod nano), do the operation as
described below.
Direct Search Function
The unit’s direct search function can be used to search for a folder,
album, song, etc. more efficiently.
•
•
Display example for USB Audio searching screen
Your vehicle must be parked with the ignition key in the ACC or ON
position. To do this, follow the procedure below.
Direct
search bar
1 Push the foot brake to bring your vehicle to a complete
stop at a safe location. Engage the parking brake.
2 Keep pushing the foot brake and release the parking
brake once then engage it again.
3 While the parking brake is being engaged the second
time, release the foot brake.
•
For automatic transmission vehicles, place the transmission lever in
the Park position.
By touching anywhere on the direct searching bar, or
touching and dragging the position mark to a desired place,
you can quickly target any song.
About iPod/iPhone models usable with this unit
•
Confirmed devices regarding Made for iPod. Correct function
of earlier versions cannot be guaranteed.
iPod touch (4th generation): Ver.4.2.1
iPod nano (6th generation): Ver.1.0
About MP3/WMA/AAC File of Flash
Memory
iPod touch (3rd generation): Ver. 4.2.1
iPod nano (5th generation): Ver.1.0.2
iPod classic (Late 2009): Ver.2.0.4
Playing back MP3/WMA/AAC
iPod touch (2nd generation): Ver.4.2.1
iPod nano (4th generation): Ver.1.0.4
iPod classic (120GB): Ver.2.0.1
iPod touch (1st generation): Ver.3.1.3
iPod nano (3rd generation): Ver.1.1.3 PC
iPod classic (80GB, 160GB): Ver.1.1.2
iPod nano (2nd generation): Ver.1.1.3
iPod (5th generation): Ver.1.3
iPod nano (1st generation): Ver.1.3.1
Confirmed devices regarding Made for iPhone. Correct
function of earlier versions cannot be guaranteed.
iPhone 4: Ver.4.2.1
iPhone 3GS: Ver.4.2.1
iPhone 3G: Ver.4.2.1
iPhone: Ver.3.1.3
For clarity in identifying your model of iPod, please see
Apple’s own document “Identifying iPod models” at
http://support.apple.com/kb/HT1353
MP3/WMA/AAC files are prepared, then stored to a Flash
memory. A media player or jukebox can also be used to sync
music to a portable device. Do not make a file’s playback time
more than 1 hour.
Media supported
This device can play back Flash memory/Portable audio player
media.
Corresponding File Systems
•
•
This device supports FAT 12/16/32 for Flash memory device/
Portable audio player.
101-EN
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
•
•
•
If a song is playing on the iPod/iPhone when it is connected to the
INA-W910, it will continue playing after the connection.
An episode may have several chapters. The chapter can be changed
Setting the iPod Control
by pressing [
] or [
].
When an iPod/iPhone is connected, you can choose to operate it from
this unit or from its own controls.
Display mode can be changed by touching [WIDE] when an iPhone
or iPod compatible video is connected. For details, refer to
If the artist, album or song name, created in iTunes, has too many
characters, songs may not be played back when connected to the
INA-W910. Therefore, a maximum of 250 characters is
recommended. The maximum number of characters for the head unit
is 128 (128 byte).
Touch and hold
or
for at least 2 seconds on
•
the iPod main screen to switch iPod control mode
between this unit and iPod/iPhone.
Once the control mode is changed, this will set pause status,
touch [
/
] to continue.
•
•
Some characters may not be correctly displayed.
“No Support” is displayed when text information is not compatible
with the INA-W910.
If the audio source is switched to Pandora during playback of video
file in iPod/iPhone, playback will start from the beginning when the
source is switched to iPod video again.
:
:
Switch the iPod control to iPod/iPhone.
Operate the iPod/iPhone using its own controls.
When iPod is selected, some functions will not be
operable via the head unit.
Switch the iPod control to this unit.
Operate the iPod/iPhone via this unit.
•
•
When using the iPod control mode, make sure the USB 30P cable is
connected to the iPod(V)/AUX Input Connector correctly by using the
AV extension cable.
Searching for a desired Song
•
•
In the iPod control mode, if nothing is played back by the iPod,
“Stop” will be displayed on this unit.
Depending upon the iPod used, iPod control may not be selectable.
Or, if iPod is selected, operation must still be from the head unit.
An iPod/iPhone can contain hundreds of songs. By keeping these songs
organized in playlists, the INA-W910 can use these to ease song
searches.
Using the search mode’s individual hierarchy, you can narrow down
your search as shown in the table below.
Playback
<MUSIC Search Menu>
Hierarchy 1
Playlists
Hierarchy 2
Songs
Hierarchy 3
Hierarchy 4
—
Songs
—
—
—
1
2
3
Press SOURCE/ on the unit.
The SOURCE selection screen is displayed.
Artists*
Albums*
Songs
Albums*
Songs
—
Touch [iPod].
The display shows the iPod mode screen.
—
—
—
Podcasts
Genres*
Episodes
Artists*
Albums*
—
—
—
Albums*
Songs
—
Songs
—
Touch [
] or [
] to select the desired song.
Composers*
Audiobooks
Return to the beginning of the current song:
Touch [ ].
—
•
Video search mode depends on the iPod/iPhone. If the specification
of the iPod/iPhone is changed, the search mode on this unit will also
be changed.
Fast backward the current song:
Touch and hold [ ].
Advance to the beginning of the next song:
Touch [ ].
For example: Searching by Artist name
The following example explains how an ARTISTS search is performed.
Another search mode can be used for the same operation, although the
hierarchy differs.
Fast forward the current song:
Touch and hold [ ].
4
To pause playback, touch [
/
].
Touching [ ] again will resume playback.
/
102-EN
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Searching by artist name
Selecting Playlist/Artist/Album/Genre/
Composer/Episode/Category
1
Touch [
].
The search mode is activated, and the search list screen
appears.
Playlist/Artist/Album/Genre/Composer/Episode/Category* can be
easily changed.
For example, if you listen to a song from a selected album, the album
can be changed.
•
Touching [
Touch [
] for at least 2 seconds will return to last search mode.
] of Music.
2
•
When an iPhone or iPod compatible video is connected. Videos mode
can also be selected to playback video files stored in iPod/iPhone. If
Videos mode is selected, the Video Playlists/Movies/Music Videos/TV
Shows/Video Podcasts/Rentals search mode may be used depending
on the connected iPod/iPhone.
Press [ ] or [ ] to select the desired
(Artist) / (Album) / (Genre) /
(Episode) / Category*.
(Playlist) /
(Composer)/
* Category can be changed only when play back the video files of
iPod/iPhone.
•
Video mode.
•
•
•
If search selection mode is not activated, a Song search is not
possible.
If an album is selected from an artist search, the album can be
searched.
If Playlist/Artist/Album/Genre/Composer/Episode are not searched,
this operation is not possible.
3
4
Touch [
] of Artists.
The Artists search screen is displayed.
Select the desired artist.
To play back the artist directly
Touch [ ] next to the artist’s name.
All songs of the selected artist are played back.
Random Play Shuffle (M.I.X.)
The Shuffle function of the iPod is displayed as
on the INA-W910.
To search for the album of an artist
1 Touch [
] of the selected artist.
Shuffle ALL:
The Albums search screen of the selected artist is displayed.
2 Touch [ ] next to the desired album’s name.
All songs of the selected album are played back.
All songs in the iPod are played back in random sequence. Any
one song does not play back again until all songs have been
played back.
Shuffle Albums:
To search for a song in the album of an artist
The songs on each album are played back in proper order. Upon
completion of all the songs on the album, the next album is
selected randomly. This continues until all albums have been
played.
1 Touch [
of an artist” in step 2.
The Songs search screen of the selected album is displayed.
2 Touch [ ] next to the desired song’s name.
The selected song is played back.
] of the desired album in “To search for the album
Shuffle Songs:
Song shuffle randomly plays back songs within a selected
category (playlist, album, etc.). The songs within the category
are played just once until all songs have been played.
•
•
•
Touching [ ] of ALL will play back all songs in the list when you are
in a hierarchy with an asterisk “*” (see table on the previous page).
Touching [
] of ALL will display the search list in the next
hierarchy.
1
Touch [
ALL]*.
In the search mode, a search can be made quickly by Alphabet skip
function to find the desired artist or song, etc. For details, refer to
When search is made during M.I.X. play, the M.I.X. play mode will be
canceled.
The songs will be played back in random sequence.
ALL
(off)
•
(Shuffle ALL)
Touch [ ] after touching [P1/2].
(off)
(Shuffle Albums)
(Shuffle Songs)
2
•
To cancel M.I.X. play, touch [
ALL] or [ ].
If a song is selected in the album search mode before selecting
Shuffle (M.I.X.), the songs will not play back randomly even when
Shuffle album is selected.
* This operation cannot be performed when play back the video files of
iPod/iPhone.
103-EN
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Repeat Play
Pandora Radio
Only Repeat One is available for the iPod.
Repeat One: A single song is repeatedly played back.
(iPhone/iPod touch)
1
2
Touch [P1/2].
The function guide is displayed.
Pandora Radio is your own FREE personalized radio now available to
stream music on your iPhone/iPod touch.
Just start with the name of one of your favorite artists, songs or classical
composers and Pandora will create a “station” that plays their music and
more music like it.
The INA-W910 enables you to interact with your Pandora account, by
connecting an iPhone or iPod touch that has the Pandora Compatible
Application already installed.
Touch [ ].
The file will be played repeatedly.
(off)
(Repeat One)
(Repeat the list being
played back)
3
To cancel repeat play, touch [ ].
For details on the Pandora Compatible Application for iPhone/iPod
touch, visit: http://www.pandora.com/on-the-iphone
To control Pandora through this INA-W910, you must be running a
version of Pandora’s mobile application that supports Pandora link, on a
compatible smartphone. For information on compatible phones and
applications, visit www.pandora.com/on-the-go
Alphabet Skip Function
The search list is arranged in alphabetical order, and can be skipped to
the titles with the next alphabetical character such as from A to B, B to
C. You can skip in reverse order such as B to A by touching
ALPHABET [ ].
•
Some of the Pandora Compatible Application for iPhone or iPod
touch are not controllable from the INA-W910.
During search mode, touch ALPHABET [ ] or [ ] to perform the
Alphabet Skip Function.
Display example for Pandora Radio screen
Direct Search Function
The unit’s direct search function can be used to search for an album,
song, etc. more efficiently.
Display example for iPod searching screen
Direct
search bar
By touching anywhere on the direct searching bar, or
touching and dragging the position mark to a desired place,
you can quickly target any song.
104-EN
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Listening to Pandora
Searching for a Desired Station
You can display your station list and select stations directly from the
INA-W910.
1
2
Launch the Pandora Application on the iPhone.
Alphabet Search
Press SOURCE/ on the unit.
The SOURCE selection screen is displayed.
1
2
Touch [ ] to activate the Search mode.
3
4
Touch [Pandora].
The display changes to Pandora mode screen.
Touch [A-Z].
The “A-Z” search mode is activated and the station names
are listed alphabetically.
To skip to the next song, touch [
].
3
Touch [ ] of the desired station.
Pandora will play that station.
•
•
The operation to replay a previous song is not available.
Pandora limits the number of skips allowed on their service. If you
attempt to skip songs beyond the limit, “No skips remaining” is
displayed.
Search by Date Added
•
•
INA-W910 remembers the source just before turning off the power.
Even if you reconnect an iPod/iPhone without launching Pandora
Application while the power is off, Pandora mode (not iPod mode) is
displayed when power is turned back on.
volume for the Pandora Radio” (page 61), Pandora source volume
may be higher than other sources.
1
2
Touch [ ] to activate the Search mode.
Touch [By Date].
The “By Date” search mode is activated and the station
names are listed by the date they were added to the
account.
•
•
•
Depending on the signal status, song may be stopped during
playback.
When the advertisement is received, the playback time will be frozen
and key operation is invalid.
3
Touch [ ] of the desired station.
Pandora will play that station.
•
•
Scroll the list one page at a time by touching [ ] or [ ].
Scroll the list one line at a time by touching [ ] or [ ].
The playback time may not be correctly displayed.
“Thumbs” Feedback
Creating a New Station
You can personalize your stations with “Thumbs Up” or “Thumbs
Down” feedback, which the system takes into account for future music
selections.
Basing on the currently playing song or artist, a personalized Pandora
station can be created. The new station will play more music like it.
During playback, touch [ ] for thumbs up, or touch [
for thumbs down.
]
1
2
During playback, touch [
The type selection list is displayed.
].
Touch [ ] (Song) or [
After displaying “Station Created”, Pandora will play the
] (Artist).
: The “ ” indicator appears in the display. Pandora will
add similar music to your station.
new station.
To cancel the operation, touch [CANCEL].
: The “ ” indicator is displayed. Pandora will ban that
song from your station, and the current song is skipped. If
the number of skips allowed has reached its limit, the
current song continues to play back.
•
•
The created station is saved to your station list.
You can also create stations using the Pandora Application on your
iPhone or on the web at www.pandora.com.
In some situations, creating a new station may not be available.
“Unable to create new station.” will be displayed.
•
In some situations, “Thumbs” feedback may not be available.
“Unable to save your thumb rating.” will be displayed.
•
105-EN
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
QuickMix
Remote Control
Use QuickMix to create a playlist based on two or more of your Pandora
stations. Edit your QuickMix station selections on the Pandora
Compatible Application for iPhone when it is not connected to the
INA-W910.
Controls on Remote Control
1
2
Touch [ ] to activate the Search mode.
Touch [A-Z] or [By Date].
The “A-Z” or “By Date” search mode is activated and the
station name is displayed.
3
•
Touch [ ] of Quick Mix.
The
indicator lights, and the songs from the created stations are
played back in random sequence.
Bookmarking a Desired Song or Artist
The currently playing song or artist can be bookmarked and saved to
your Pandora account.
1
2
During playback, touch [ ].
The type selection list is displayed.
Touch [ ] (Song) or [
] (Artist).
The current song or artist is bookmarked. “Bookmark Song”
or “Bookmark Artist” is displayed.
To cancel the operation, touch [CANCEL].
•
•
Your bookmarks can be viewed on your “Profile” page at
www.pandora.com.
In some situations, bookmarks may not be available. “Unable to save
your bookmark.” will be displayed.
PWR Button
Turns the power ON and OFF.
SRC Button
Selects the audio source.
Changing the Display
DN Button
Radio mode: Selects, in descending order, stations
programed into the radio’s presets.
MP3/WMA/AAC mode:
Touch [INFO.].
Each time you touch this button, the display changes as shown
below.
Folder Select (DN) Button selects the folder.
Changer mode:
Song title
Artist title
Album title
Song title
Artist title
Station title
DISC Select (DN) Button selects a disc in
descending order.
iPod/iPhone mode:
Selects playlist/artist/album/genre/composer/
episode in descending order.
SiriusXM mode:
Selects, in descending order, the next
SiriusXM preset channel in the selected band.
VOLUME
/
Button
Increase or decreases the volume level.
RETURN Button
DVD/Video CD (PBC ON) mode:
Returns to the previous display. (Does not
return in some discs.)
106-EN
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Button
DISP/TOP M. Button
Radio mode: SEEK (DN) button
DVD Video/Video CD mode:
CD/Changer mode:
Shows playback status (only when car is
stopped).
DVD Video mode:
Press the button to go back to the beginning
of the current track. Press and hold to fast
reverse.
By pressing more than 2 seconds, shows the
top menu display.
MP3/WMA/AAC iPod mode:
Press the button to go back to the beginning
of the current file. Press and hold to fast
reverse.
SETUP Button
Not used.
AUDIO Button
DVD Video/Video CD mode:
Switches audio.
DVD Video/Video CD:
Move to the desired position on the disc.
•
•
During playback, press and hold for
more than 1 second to reverse the disc
at double speed. Hold for more than 5
seconds to reverse the disc at 8 times
the normal speed. Hold for more than 10
seconds to reverse the disc at 21 times
the normal speed.
BAND Button
Changes the band.
Radio mode:
Changer mode: Switches the disc mode.
(when an optional KCA-410C is connected)
DVD Video/Video CD mode:
While playing a DVD, the display mode is
switched (only when car is stopped).
SiriusXM mode:
DVD Video:
•
When pressed and held in while in the
pause mode, the disc is played in
reverse slow motion at 1/8th the normal
speed. When held in for 5 more
seconds, the reverse slow motion speed
switches to 1/2 the normal speed.
The picture is reversed by one frame
each time the button is pressed in the
pause mode.
When not in Replay mode, press this
button to select, in descending order,
the next channel.
When in Replay mode, press this button
to reverse to the beginning of the current
track or the previous track.
Press and hold for at least 2 seconds to
recall the saved Jump source channel. Press
and hold again will jump back to the previous
mode or SiriusXM channel.
•
•
•
•
A.PROC Button
When an external audio processor is connected:
Press the button to display the audio
processor setting screen.
When an external audio processor is non-connected:
Press the button to display the audio mode
screen.
SiriusXM mode:
MUTE Button
Lowers the volume by 20 dB instantly. Press the button
again to cancel.
When in Replay mode, press and hold
this button to fast-reverse.
/
Button
Radio mode: Chooses the tuning mode.
By pressing it more than 2 seconds,
Automatic Memory will be operated.
Disc/iPod mode: Switches between play and pause.
SiriusXM mode: This button toggles between Replay Mode
Pause and Play.
UP Button
Radio mode: Selects, in ascending order, stations
programed into the radio’s presets.
MP3/WMA/AAC mode:
Folder Select (UP) Button to selects the
folder.
Changer mode:
DISC Select (UP) Button selects a disc in
ascending order.
iPod/iPhone mode:
Selects a playlist/artist/album/genre/
composer/podcast in ascending order.
SiriusXM mode: Selects, in ascending order, the next
SiriusXM preset channel in the selected
band.
•
SEARCH Button: Not used.
Button
Performs stop.
DVD Video/Video CD:
Pressing once stops the PRE stop; Pressing
twice sets stop.
SiriusXM mode: This button exits Replay mode to live audio.
MENU Button
DVD Video mode:
,
,
,
Shows the menu display.
DVD Video mode:
CLR Button
Selects an item displayed in the screen.
Delete the previous number on numeric keypad or close the
numeric keypad screen.
ENT. Button
Enters the selected item and press the button to confirm
your selection as on the numeric keypad input screen.
107-EN
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Button
Radio mode: SEEK (UP) button
CD/Changer mode:
When Using the Remote Control
• Point the remote control at the remote sensor within
about 2 meters.
• It may not be possible to operate the remote control if
the remote control sensor is exposed to direct
sunlight.
• The remote control is a small, lightweight precision
device. To avoid damage, short battery life,
operational errors and poor response, observe the
following.
Press the button to advance to the beginning
of the next track. Press and hold to fast
forward.
MP3/WMA/AAC iPod mode:
Press the button to advance to the beginning
of the next file. Press and hold to fast
forward.
DVD Video/Video CD:
Move to the desired position on the disc.
•
•
During playback, press and hold for more
than 1 second to forward the disc at
double speed. Hold for more than 5
seconds to forward the disc at 8 times the
normal speed. Hold for more than 10
seconds to forward the disc at 21 times
the normal speed.
- Do not subject the remote control to excessive
shock.
- Do not put in a trouser pocket.
- Keep away from food, moisture and dirt.
- Do not place in direct sunshine.
DVD Video/Video CD:
Battery Replacement
•
When pressed and held in while in the
pause mode, the disc is played in slow
motion at 1/8th the normal speed. When
held in for 5 more seconds, the slow
motion speed switches to 1/2 the normal
speed.
The picture is forwarded by one frame
each time the button is pressed in the
pause mode.
Battery type: CR2025 battery or equivalent.
1
Opening the battery case
Slide out the battery cover while firmly pressing in the
direction of the arrow.
•
•
•
•
SiriusXM mode:
When not in Replay mode, press this
button to select, in ascending order, the
next channel.
When in Replay mode, press this button
to skip forward to the beginning of the
next track.
When in Replay mode, press and hold
this button to fast-forward.
Numeric Keypad
Inputs numbers.
MONITOR Button
Not used.
ANGLE Button
DVD Video mode:
Switches the angle of the picture.
SUBTITLE Button
DVD Video mode:
Switches the subtitle.
•
•
The SETUP operation of the unit cannot be carried out from the
remote control.
Some operations may not be possible depending on the disc.
108-EN
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2
Replacing the battery
Put the battery in the case with the (+) indication upward as
Information
shown in the illustration.
About DVDs
Music CDs and DVDs have grooves (tracks) in which the digital data is
recorded. The data is represented as microscopic pits recorded into the
track – these pits are read by a laser beam to play the disc. On DVDs,
the density of the tracks and pits is twice that of CDs, so DVDs can
contain more data in less space.
CDs
•
Placing a battery in backwards way may cause a malfunction.
3
Closing the cover
Slide the cover as illustrated until a click is heard.
Minimum pit
length -
0.9 µm
Track pitch -
1.6 µm
1.2 mm
DVDs
Minimumpit
length -
0.9 µm
0.6 mm
0.6 mm
Track pitch -
0.74 µm
A 12 cm disc can contain one movie or about four hours of music. In
addition, DVDs provide sharp picture quality with vivid colors thanks to
a horizontal resolution of over 500 lines (compared to less than 300 for
VHS tape).
Warning
DO NOT OPERATE ANY FUNCTION THAT TAKES
YOUR ATTENTION AWAY FROM SAFELY DRIVING
YOUR VEHICLE.
In addition, DVDs offer a variety of functions.
Any function that requires your prolonged attention should
only be performed after coming to a complete stop. Always
stop the vehicle in a safe location before performing these
functions. Failure to do so may result in an accident.
Movies can be recorded in up to eight languages. The desired
language can be selected from the unit.
Movies can include subtitles in up to 32 languages. The desired
subtitle language can be selected from the unit.
When the DVD contains a movie shot from multiple angles, the
desired angle can be selected from the unit.
Multi story function*
With this function, a single movie includes various story lines.
You can select different story lines to view various versions of the
same movie.
Operation differs from disc to disc. Story line selection screens
including instructions appear during the movie. Just follow the
instructions.
* These functions differ from disc to disc. For details, refer to the disc’s
instructions.
109-EN
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Dolby Pro Logic II
Terminology
Dolby Pro Logic II plays 2-channel sources in 5 channels over
the entire frequency range.
This is done with an advance, high sound quality matrix
surround decoder which draws out the spatial properties of the
original recording without adding any sounds to or changing the
sound of the source.
Dolby Digital
Dolby Digital is a digital audio compression technology
developed by Dolby Laboratories that allows large quantities of
audio data to be efficiently recorded on discs. It is compatible
with audio signals from mono (1 channel) all the way up to 5.1-
channel surround sound. The signals for the different channels
are completely independent, and since the sound is high quality
digital there is no loss of sound quality.
* The separately sold digital audio processor (PXA-H700, etc.) is
required to enjoy Dolby Pro Logic II surround sound.
Linear PCM audio (LPCM)
LPCM is a signal recording format used for music CDs.
Whereas music CDs are recorded at 44.1 kHz/16 bits, DVDs are
recorded at 48 kHz/16 bits to 96 kHz/24 bits, thereby achieving
higher sound quality than music CDs.
Rating levels (parental lock)
This is a function of the DVD for restricting the viewing age as
stipulated by laws in different countries. The way in which
viewing is restricted differs from DVD to DVD. Sometimes the
DVD cannot be played at all, other times certain scenes are
skipped, and other times certain scenes are replaced with other
scenes.
Center
speaker
Front
speakers
Rear
speakers
Subwoofer
Speaker layout for enjoying
Dolby Digital sound/DTS sound
DTS
This is a home-use digital sound format of the DTS Sound
System. This is a high quality sound system, developed by DTS,
Inc. for use in movie theaters.
DTS has six independent sound tracks. The theater presentation
is fully realized in the home and other settings. DTS is the
abbreviation for Digital Theater System.
* To enjoy DTS surround sound you need the separately sold DTS
digital audio processor (PXA-H700, etc.). The DVD video software
must also have a DTS sound track.
The INA-W910 has a built-in DTS 2-channel audio decoder.
Analogue audio outputs are available.
110-EN
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
List of Language Codes
Abbreviation Code
Language
6565 Afar
6566 Abkhazian
Abbreviation Code
Language
7369 Interlingue
7375 Inupiak
Abbreviation Code
Language
8278 Kirundi
8279 Romanian
AA
AB
AF
AM
AR
AS
AY
AZ
BA
BE
BG
BH
BI
IE
RN
RO
RU
RW
SA
SD
SG
SH
SI
IK
6570 Afrikaans
6577 Amharic
6582 Arabic
IN
7378 Indonesian
7383 Icelandic
7384 Italian
8285 Russian
8287 Kinyarwanda
8365 Sanskrit
8368 Sindhi
IS
IT
6583 Assamese
6589 Aymara
6590 Azerbaijani
6665 Bashkir
6669 Byelorussian
6671 Bulgarian
6672 Bihari
IW
JP
7387 Hebrew
7465 Japanese
7473 Yiddish
8371 Sangho
8372 Serbo-Croatian
8373 Singhalese
8375 Slovak
8376 Slovenian
8377 Samoan
8378 Shona
8379 Somali
8381 Albanian
8382 Serbian
8383 Siswati
8384 Sesotho
8385 Sundanese
8386 Swedish
8387 Swahili
8465 Tamil
JI
JW
KA
KK
KL
KM
KN
KO
KS
KU
KY
LA
LN
LO
LT
7487 Javanese
7565 Georgian
7575 Kazakh
7576 Greenlandic
7577 Cambodian
7578 Kannada
7579 Korean
SK
SL
SM
SN
SO
SQ
SR
SS
ST
SU
SE
SW
TA
TE
TG
TH
TI
6673 Bislama
6678 Bengali, Bangla
6679 Tibetan
6682 Breton
BN
BO
BR
CA
CO
CS
CY
DA
DE
DZ
EL
EN
EO
ES
ET
EU
FA
7583 Kashmiri
7585 Kurdish
7589 Kirghiz
6765 Catalan
6779 Corsican
6783 Czech
7665 Latin
6789 Welsh
7678 Lingala
6865 Danish
6869 German
6890 Bhutani
6976 Greek
7679 Laothian
7684 Lithuanian
7686 Latvian, Lettish
7771 Malagasy
7773 Maori
LV
8469 Telugu
8471 Tajik
MG
MI
6978 English
6979 Esperanto
6983 Spanish
6984 Estonian
6985 Basque
7065 Persian
7073 Finnish
7074 Fiji
8472 Thai
MK
ML
MN
MO
MR
MS
MT
MY
NA
NE
NL
NO
OC
OM
OR
PA
PL
PS
PT
QU
RM
7775 Macedonian
7776 Malayalam
7778 Mongolian
7779 Moldavian
7782 Marathi
8473 Tigrinya
8475 Turkmen
8476 Tagalog
8478 Setswana
8479 Tonga
8482 Turkish
8483 Tsonga
8484 Tatar
TK
TL
TN
TO
TR
TS
TT
FI
7783 Malay
FJ
7784 Maltese
7789 Burmese
7865 Nauru
FO
FR
FY
GA
GD
GL
GN
GU
HA
HI
7079 Faroese
7082 French
7089 Frisian
7165 Irish
TW
UK
UR
UZ
VI
8487 Twi
7869 Nepali
8575 Ukrainian
8582 Urdu
7876 Dutch
7168 Scots Gaelic
7176 Galician
7178 Guarani
7185 Gujarati
7265 Hausa
7879 Norwegian
7967 Occitan
7977 (Afan) Oromo
7982 Oriya
8590 Uzbek
8673 Vietnamese
8679 Volapuk
8779 Wolof
VO
WO
XH
YO
CN
ZU
8065 Punjabi
8076 Polish
8872 Xhosa
8979 Yoruba
9072 Chinese
9085 Zulu
7273 Hindi
HR
HU
HY
IA
7282 Croatian
7285 Hungarian
7289 Armenian
7365 Interlingua
8083 Pashto, Pushto
8084 Portuguese
8185 Quechua
8277 Rhaeto-Romance
111-EN
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
List of Country Codes
Abbreviation Code
Country
6568 Andorra
Abbreviation Code
Country
Abbreviation Code
Country
7573 Kiribati
7577 Comoros
Saint Kitts and Nevis
AD
AE
AF
AG
AI
DM
DO
DZ
EC
EE
EG
EH
ER
ES
ET
FI
6877 Dominica
KI
6569 United Arab Emirates
6570 Afghanistan
6571 Antigua and Barbuda
6573 Anguilla
6879 Dominican Republic
6890 Algeria
KM
KN
KP
7578
6967 Ecuador
6969 Estonia
7580 Korea, Democratic
People’s Republic of
6971 Egypt
KR
KW
KY
KZ
LA
7582
Korea, Republic of
AL
6576 Albania
6577 Armenia
AM
AN
AO
AQ
AR
AS
AT
AU
AW
AZ
BA
BB
BD
BE
BF
BG
BH
BI
6972 Western Sahara
6982 Eritrea
7587 Kuwait
6578 Netherlands Antilles
6579 Angola
6581 Antarctica
6582 Argentina
6583 American Samoa
6584 Austria
7589 Cayman Islands
6983 Spain
7590
Kazakstan
7665 Lao People’s
Democratic Republic
Lebanon
6984 Ethiopia
7073 Finland
FJ
7074 Fiji
LB
LC
LI
7666
FK
FM
FO
FR
GA
GB
GD
GE
GF
GH
GI
7075 Falkland Islands
7667 Saint Lucia
6585 Australia
7077
Micronesia, Federated States of
7673 Liechtenstein
7079 Faroe Islands
7082 France
LK
LR
LS
LT
7675
Sri Lanka
6587 Aruba
6590 Azerbaijan
6665 Bosnia and Herzegovina
6666 Barbados
6668 Bangladesh
6669 Belgium
7682 Liberia
7683 Lesotho
7165 Gabon
7166 United Kingdom
7168 Grenada
7169 Georgia
7684
Lithuania
LU
LV
LY
MA
MC
MD
MG
MH
MK
7685 Luxembourg
7686 Latvia
7170 French Guiana
7172 Ghana
7689
Libyan Arab Jamahiriya
6670 Burkina Faso
6671 Bulgaria
7765 Morocco
7767 Monaco
6672 Bahrain
7173 Gibraltar
7176 Greenland
7177 Gambia
GL
GM
GN
GP
GQ
GR
GS
7768
Moldova, Republic of
6673 Burundi
BJ
6674 Benin
7771 Madagascar
7772 Marshall Islands
BM
BN
BO
BR
BS
BT
BV
BW
BY
BZ
CA
CC
CD
6677 Bermuda
6678 Brunei Darussalam
6679 Bolivia
7178 Guinea
7180 Guadeloupe
7181 Equatorial Guinea
7182 Greece
7775
Macedonia, The former
Yugoslav Republic of
ML
MM
MN
MO
MP
MQ
MR
MS
MT
MU
MV
MW
MX
MY
MZ
NA
NC
NE
NF
NG
NI
7776 Mali
6682 Brazil
7777 Myanmar
7778 Mongolia
7779 Macau
6683 Bahamas
6684 Bhutan
7183 South Georgia and the
South Sandwich Islands
6686 Bouvet Island
6687 Botswana
6689 Belarus
GT
GU
GW
GY
HK
HM
7184 Guatemala
7185 Guam
7780 Northern Mariana Islands
7781 Martinique
7782 Mauritania
7783 Montserrat
7784 Malta
7187 Guinea-Bissau
7189 Guyana
6690 Belize
6765 Canada
7275 Hong Kong
6767 Cocos (Keeling) Islands
7277 Heard Island and
McDonald Islands
7785 Mauritius
7786 Maldives
7787 Malawi
6768 Congo, the Democratic
Republic of the
HN
HR
HT
HU
ID
7278 Honduras
7282 Croatia
7284 Haiti
CF
CG
CH
CI
6770 Central African Republic
6771 Congo
7788 Mexico
6772 Switzerland
6773 Cote d’lvoire
6775 Cook Islands
6776 Chile
7789 Malaysia
7790 Mozambique
7865 Namibia
7867 New Caledonia
7869 Niger
7285 Hungary
7368 Indonesia
7369 Ireland
7376 Israel
CK
CL
CM
CN
CO
CR
CU
CV
CX
CY
CZ
DE
DJ
IE
IL
6777 Cameroon
6778 China
IN
7378 India
7870 Norfolk Island
7871 Nigeria
IO
7379
British Indian Ocean Territory
6779 Colombia
6782 Costa Rica
6785 Cuba
IQ
7381 Iraq
7873 Nicaragua
7876 Netherlands
7879 Norway
IR
7382 Iran, Islamic Republic of
7383 Iceland
7384 Italy
NL
IS
6786 Cape Verde
6788 Christmas Island
6789 Cyprus
NO
NP
NR
NU
NZ
OM
PA
IT
7880 Nepal
JM
JO
JP
KE
KG
KH
7477 Jamaica
7479 Jordan
7882 Nauru
6790 Czech Republic
6869 Germany
6874 Djibouti
7885 Niue
7480 Japan
7890 New Zealand
7977 Oman
7569 Kenya
7571 Kyrgyzstan
7572 Cambodia
DK
6875 Denmark
8065 Panama
112-EN
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Abbreviation Code
Country
Abbreviation Code
Country
Abbreviation Code
Country
PE
PF
PG
PH
PK
PL
8069 Peru
SJ
8374 Svalbard and Jan Mayen
8375 Slovakia
TW
TZ
8487 Taiwan, Province of China
8490 Tanzania, United Republic of
8070 French Polynesia
8071 Papua New Guinea
8072 Philippines
8075 Pakistan
SK
SL
SM
SN
SO
SR
ST
SV
SY
SZ
TC
TD
TF
TG
TH
TJ
8376 Sierra Leone
8377 San Marino
8378 Senegal
UA
UG
UM
8565 Ukraine
8571 Uganda
8577 United States Minor
Outlying Islands
8583 United States
8589 Uruguay
8076 Poland
8379 Somalia
US
UY
UZ
VA
VC
PM
PN
PR
PT
PW
PY
QA
RE
RO
RU
RW
SA
SB
SC
SD
SE
SG
SH
SI
8077
Saint Pierre and Miquelon
8382 Suriname
8078 Pitcairn
8384 Sao Tome and Principe
8386 El Salvador
8389 Syrian Arab Republic
8390 Swaziland
8467 Turks and Caicos Islands
8468 Chad
8590 Uzbekistan
8082 Puerto Rico
8084 Portugal
8665
Holy See (Vatican City State)
8667 Saint Vincent and the
Grenadines
8087 Palau
8089 Paraguay
8165 Qatar
VE
VG
VI
8669 Venezuela
8671 Virgin Island, British
8673 Virgin Islands, U.S
8678 Viet Nam
8269 Reunion
8279 Romania
8285 Russian Federation
8287 Rwanda
8470 French Southern Territories
8471 Togo
VN
VU
WF
WS
YE
YT
YU
ZA
ZM
ZW
8472 Thailand
8685 Vanuatu
8474 Tajikistan
8770 Wallis and Futuna
8783 Samoa
8365 Saudi Arabia
8366 Solomon Islands
8367 Seychelles
8368 Sudan
TK
TM
TN
TO
TP
TR
TT
TV
8475 Tokelau
8477 Turkmenistan
8478 Tunisia
8969 Yemen
8984 Mayotte
8479 Tonga
8985 Yugoslavia
9065 South Africa
9077 Zambia
8369 Sweden
8480 East Timor
8482 Turkey
8371 Singapore
8372 Saint Helena
8373 Slovenia
8484 Trinidad and Tobago
8486 Tuvalu
9087 Zimbabwe
113-EN
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
No operation
•
Moisture condensation
In Case of Difficulty
-
Allow enough time for the condensation to evaporate (about 1 hour).
•
Ambient Temperature
- Make sure the temperature inside the vehicle is between 0 °C
and 45 °C (32 °F and 113 °F).
If you encounter a problem, please turn the power off, then on again.
If the unit is still not functioning normally, please review the items in
the following checklist. This guide will help you isolate the problem
if the unit is at fault. Otherwise, make sure the rest of your system is
properly connected, or then consult your authorized Alpine dealer or
Alpine directly at 1-888-NAV-HELP (1-888-628-4357).
Radio
Unable to receive stations.
•
No antenna, or open connection in the antenna cable.
- Make sure the antenna is properly connected; replace the
antenna or cable if necessary.
Basic
Unable to tune stations in the seek mode.
You are in a weak signal area.
- Make sure the tuner is in DX mode.
If the area you are in is a primary signal area, the antenna may
not be grounded and connected properly.
- Check your antenna connections; make sure the antenna is
properly grounded at its mounting location.
The antenna may not be the proper length.
- Make sure the antenna is fully extended; if broken, replace the
antenna with a new one.
No function or display.
Vehicle’s ignition is off.
•
•
- If connected according to the instructions, the unit will not
operate with the vehicle’s ignition off.
Improper power lead connections.
- Check power lead connections.
Blown fuse.
- Check the fuse on the battery lead of the unit; replace with the
proper value if necessary.
Internal micro-computer malfunctioned due to interference
noise, etc.
- Press the RESET switch with a ballpoint pen or other pointed
article.
- Press any button to power on this unit.
Display OFF mode is activated.
•
•
•
•
•
•
Broadcast is noisy.
•
•
•
The antenna is not the proper length.
- Extend the antenna fully; replace it if it is broken.
The antenna is poorly grounded.
-
Make sure the antenna is grounded properly at its mounting location.
- Cancel Display OFF mode.
The station signal is weak and noisy.
- If above solution does not work, tune in another station.
No sound or unnatural sound.
•
Incorrect setting of volume/balance/fader controls.
- Readjust the controls.
Connections are not properly or securely made.
- Check the connections and firmly connect.
CD/MP3/WMA/AAC/DVD
Disc playback sound is wavering.
•
•
Moisture condensation in the disc Module.
- Allow enough time for the condensation to evaporate (about 1
hour).
Screen not displayed.
•
Brightness control is set at the minimum position.
- Adjust the Brightness control.
Temperature in the vehicle is too low.
- Increase the vehicle’s interior temperature to operation
temperature range.
Connections to the DVD, CD player are not securely made.
- Check the connections and firmly connect.
Disc insertion not possible.
•
A disc is already in the DVD player.
•
- Eject the disc and remove it.
•
The disc is being improperly inserted.
- Make sure the disc is being inserted following the instructions
in the CD/MP3/WMA/AAC, DVD Player Operation section.
•
Disc ejection not possible.
Movement of displayed picture is abnormal.
•
There is dust in the DVD Player.
•
Temperature in the vehicle is too high.
- After touching [Eject] of Disc on the Eject/Tilt screen, insert
another disc into the Disc Slot*. A part of the blocked disc will
be ejected, and then pull the disc out.
- Allow the vehicle’s interior temperature to cool.
Unclear or noisy display.
TFT-LCD MODULE is worn out.
- Replace the TFT-LCD MODULE.
•
* Insert the disc as the Disc Slot space allows, and stop inserting while
an obstacle occurs. Do not force it into the slot to avoid a
malfunction.
The remote control is inoperative.
•
The remote control sensor setting of “Rear Entertainment
Function” is not set to this unit.
- Set for this unit.
Navigation
The vehicle’s position is erroneous.
•
The GPS reception is poor.
- Drive the vehicle in an area of good GPS reception to allow the
unit to recalibrate itself. Move to a location where strong GPS
reception is possible.
If the above mentioned solution does not solve the problem,
consult your nearest Alpine dealer.
114-EN
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Unable to fast forward or backward the disc.
Picture is unclear or noisy.
•
The disc has been damaged.
- Eject the disc and discard it; using a damaged disc in your unit
can cause damage to the mechanism.
•
Disc is being fast-forwarded or fast-reversed.
- The picture may be slightly disturbed, but this is normal.
Vehicle’s battery power is weak.
•
Disc playback sound skips due to vibration.
- Check the battery power and wiring.
•
•
•
•
Improper mounting of the unit.
- Securely re-mount the unit.
Disc is very dirty.
- Clean the disc.
Disc has scratches.
- Change the disc.
The pick-up lens is dirty.
- Do not use a commercially available lens cleaner disc. Consult
your nearest Alpine dealer.
(The unit may malfunction if the battery power is under 11
volts with a load applied.)
Image stops sometimes.
Disc is scratched.
- Replaced with a non-scratched disc.
•
Indication for CD/MP3/WMA/AAC
Disc playback sound skips without vibration.
•
•
No disc is inserted.
- Insert a disc.
Although a disc is inserted, “No Disc” is displayed and the unit
does not start to play or eject the disc.
- Remove the disc by following these steps.
•
Dirty or scratched disc.
- Clean the disc; damaged disc should be replaced.
CD-R/CD-RW playback not possible.
•
Close session (finalization) has not been performed.
- Perform finalization and attempt playback again.
Press
for at least 3 seconds.
Error displays.
•
Mechanical error.
- Touch [Eject] of Disc on the Eject/Tilt screen. After the error
indication disappears, insert the disc again. If the above-
mentioned solution does not solve the problem, consult your
nearest Alpine dealer.
MP3/WMA/AAC is not played back.
•
Writing error occurred. The CD format is not compatible.
- Make sure the CD has been written in a supported format.
rewrite in the format supported by this device.
•
Mechanism error.
1) Touch [Eject] of Disc on the Eject/Tilt screen and eject the
disc. If not ejecting, consult your Alpine dealer.
2) When the error indication remains after ejecting, touch
[Eject] of Disc on the Eject/Tilt screen again.
If the error indication still does not turn off after trying to
touch [Eject] of Disc on the Eject/Tilt screen. for a few
times, consult your Alpine dealer.
Disc was forcibly pulled out by hand during Auto Loading.
- When the error indication remains after loading, try to load
again.
Unit does not operate.
•
Monitor’s power is not turned on.
- Turn on the monitor’s power.
Condensation.
- Wait a while (about 1 hour) for the condensation to dry.
•
•
No picture is produced.
•
Monitor’s mode is not switched to the mode you want to see.
- Switch to the mode you want to see.
If the error indication still does not turn off after pressing for a
few times, consult your Alpine dealer.
•
Monitor’s parking brake lead is not connected.
- Connect the monitor’s parking brake wire and set the parking
brake. (For details, refer to the monitor’s instructions.)
Playback does not start.
•
Scratched disc, contaminated disc/poor recording/disc
incompatible with this unit.
- Touch [Eject] of Disc on the Eject/Tilt screen.
- Change the disc.
•
•
•
•
Disc is loaded upside-down.
- Check the disc and load it with the labeled side facing upward.
Disc is dirty.
- Clean the disc.
A disc not able to play back with this unit is loaded.
- Check if the disc is able to be played back.
Parental lock is set.
- Cancel the parental lock or change the rating level.
•
•
A copy-protected WMA file was played back.
- You can only play back non-copy-protected files.
A sampling rate/bit rate not supported by the unit is used.
- Use a sampling rate/bit rate is supported by the unit.
115-EN
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Indication for DVD/Video CD
Indication for CD changer
•
•
No disc is inserted.
- Insert a disc.
Although a disc is inserted, “No Disc” is displayed and the unit
does not start to play or eject the disc.
- Remove the disc by following these steps.
•
Protective circuit is activated due to high temperature.
- The indicator will disappear when the temperature returns to
within operation range.
Press
for at least 3 seconds.
•
•
Malfunction in the CD Changer.
- Consult your Alpine dealer. Press the magazine eject button
and pull out the magazine.
Check the indication. Insert the magazine again.
If the magazine cannot be pulled out, consult your Alpine
dealer.
•
Button operation on the unit or remote control is not possible.
- For some discs or playing modes, certain operations are not
possible. This is not a malfunction.
Magazine ejection not possible.
- Press the magazine eject button. If the magazine does not eject,
consult your Alpine dealer.
•
Disc does not match regional code number.
- Load a disc that matches the regional code number.
•
A disc is left inside the CD Changer.
- Press the eject button to activate the eject function. When the
CD Changer finishes the eject function, insert an empty CD
magazine into the CD Changer to receive the disc left inside
the CD Changer.
•
Mechanism error.
1) Touch [Eject] of Disc on the Eject/Tilt screen and eject the
disc.
If not ejecting, consult your Alpine dealer.
2) When the error indication remains after ejecting, touch
[Eject] of Disc on the Eject/Tilt screen again.
If the error indication still does not turn off after touching
[Eject] of Disc on the Eject/Tilt screen for a few times,
consult your Alpine dealer.
•
•
No magazine is loaded into the CD Changer.
- Insert a magazine.
No indicated disc.
- Choose another disc.
•
Scratched disc, contaminated disc/poor recording/disc
incompatible with this unit.
- Touch [Eject] of Disc on the Eject/Tilt screen.
- Change the disc.
•
The DVD setup operation was attempted when a disc is inserted
in the unit.
- Eject the disc before the DVD setup operation.
116-EN
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SiriusXM Advisory Messages
The following messages may be displayed while operating the unit
in SiriusXM mode.
•
A locked channel is selected.
- Input the passcode on the number keypad screen, refer to
“Parental Lock Function” on page 96. If wrong passcode is
input, “Incorrect Lock Code” will be displayed and the unit
will revert to the previous channel.
•
•
The SiriusXM Tuner is disconnected or the unit is having trouble
communicating with the Tuner.
- Connect the Tuner or check the Tuner connection to the back
of the unit.
•
•
Buffer for Replay will be full within 11 seconds.
The SiriusXM Satellite Radio antenna or cable is either damaged
or not connected correctly to the SiriusXM Tuner.
- Check that the SiriusXM antenna cable is connected to the
SiriusXM Tuner and check that the antenna cable is not kinked
or otherwise damaged. Replace the antenna if necessary.
The Replay buffer is full.
- Memory for storing Alert items is full. Delete some items
before you add more items.
Indication for iPod/iPhone Mode
•
The SiriusXM satellite signal is too weak at the current location.
- Move the vehicle to a location with a clear view of the southern
sky.
- Make sure the Satellite Radio antenna is properly mounted and
not obstructed by metal objects.
•
•
Abnormal current is run to the USB connector device.
- Attempt to connect another iPod/iPhone.
An iPod/iPhone that is not supported by the unit is connected.
- Connect an iPod/iPhone that is supported by the unit.
- Reset the iPod.
•
The active channel has become unsubscribed or the requested
channel is not available in your subscription package.
NOTE
•
The unit will revert to the previous selected channel or to
channel 1 automatically.
- Visit www.siriusxm.com for information on subscribing to this
channel.
•
•
An iPod/iPhone is not connected.
- Make sure the iPod/iPhone is correctly connected and the cable
is not excessively bent.
•
The active channel is no longer in the SiriusXM channel lineup
or the user has entered an invalid channel number.
There are no songs in the iPod/iPhone.
- Download songs to the iPod/iPhone and connect to the
INA-W910.
NOTE
•
The unit will revert to the previous channel or to channel 1
automatically.
- Visit www.siriusxm.com for information on the current
channel lineup.
•
•
Database error or decoder error.
- You can solve the problem by reconnecting the iPod/iPhone.
•
Your subscription has been updated.
- Press any button to clear this message.
Communication error or boot error, etc.
- You can solve the problem by reconnecting the iPod/iPhone or
changing source.
117-EN
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
•
•
A Flash memory/Portable audio player is not connected.
- Make sure the Flash memory device/Portable audio player is
correctly connected and the cable of Portable audio player is
not excessively bent.
•
The iPod/iPhone is not verified.
- Change another iPod/iPhone.
(Pandora Radio mode)
•
You have not created any personalized Pandora Stations.
- When you are not driving, use the Pandora Compatible
Application for iPhone to create your Pandora station(s).
There are no songs in the Flash memory/Portable audio player.
- Download songs to the Flash memory/Portable audio player
and connect to this unit.
•
•
A sampling rate/bit rate not supported by the unit is used.
- Use a sampling rate/bit rate that is supported by the unit.
(Pandora Radio mode)
•
The music cannot be played because the Pandora Compatible
Application for iPhone requires the user’s attention. Please do
not see your mobile device while driving.
- When you are not driving, please see the Pandora Compatible
Application for iPhone.
A copy-protected WMA file was played back.
- You can only play back non-copy-protected files.
- Make sure the Portable audio player is set to MTP.
(Pandora Radio mode)
•
•
•
Database error or decoder error.
- You can solve the problem by reconnecting the Flash memory/
Portable audio player.
•
You switched this unit to Pandora mode with an iPhone or iPod
touch connected, without launching or installing the Pandora
Application.
- Launch the Pandora Application on the iPhone or iPod touch.
- Select a source other than Pandora.
Communication error or boot error, etc.
- You can solve the problem by reconnecting the Flash memory/
Portable audio player or changing source.
Indication for Flash memory/Portable audio player mode
•
Abnormal current is run to the USB connector device.
Flash memory/Portable audio player is a malfunction or it is
shorted.
The Portable audio player is not verified.
- Change another Portable audio player.
- Connect another Flash memory/Portable audio player.
BLUETOOTH mode
•
A USB device/Portable audio player that is not supported by the
unit is connected.
•
The BLUETOOTH device is not connected.
- Connect the BLUETOOTH device.
- Attempt to connect another Flash memory/Portable audio
player.
118-EN
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
GENERAL
Specifications
Power Requirement
14.4 V DC
(11–16 V allowable)
+32 °F to +113 °F
(0 °C to + 45 °C)
18 W RMS × 4*
MONITOR SECTION
Operating temperature
Power Output
Screen Size
7.0"
LCD Type
Transparent type TN LCD
TFT active matrix
* Primary amplifier ratings per CEA-2006 Standard
Operation System
•
•
Power output: measured at 4 Ohms and 1% THD+N
S/N: 80 dBA (reference: 1 W into 4 Ohms)
Number of Picture Elements 1,152,000 pcs. (800 × 3 × 480)
Effective Number of Picture Elements
99% or more
Output Voltage
Bass
4,000 mV/10 k ohms
14 dB at 60 Hz
Illumination System
LED
Treble
14 dB at 10 kHz
Weight
2.7 kg (5 lbs. 15 oz)
FM TUNER SECTION
Audio output level
Tuning Range
87.7 – 107.9 MHz
Preout (Front, Rear): 4 V/10 k ohms (max.)
Preout (Subwoofer): 4 V/10 k ohms (max.)
Mono Usable Sensitivity
50 dB Quieting Sensitivity
9.3 dBf (0.8 µV/75 ohms)
13.5 dBf (1.3 µV/75 ohms)
AUX OUT:
Ai-NET:
1.2 V/10 k ohms
850 mV
Alternate Channel Selectivity 80 dB
Signal-to-Noise Ratio
Stereo Separation
Capture Ratio
65 dB
35 dB
2.0 dB
CHASSIS SIZE (Monitor section)
Width
Height
Depth
178 mm (7")
100 mm (3-15/16")
164.6 mm (6-1/2")
AM TUNER SECTION
Tuning Range
530 – 1,710 kHz
22.5 µV/27 dBf
BLUETOOTH SECTION
Usable Sensitivity
BLUETOOTH Specification Bluetooth V2.0
NAVIGATION SECTION
Output Power
Profile
+4 dBm Max. (Power class 2)
HFP (Hands-Free Profile)
HSP (Head Set Profile)
Received Frequency
Receiving Sensitivity
1.57542 1.023 MHz
-130 dBm
REMOTE CONTROL
USB SECTION
Battery Type
Width
CR2025 battery
51 mm (2")
USB requirements
USB Class
USB 1.1/2.0
USB (Play From Device)/
USB (Mass Storage Class)
FAT12/16/32
Height
119 mm (4-11/16")
13 mm (1/2")
Depth
File System
Weight
40 g (1.4 oz)
(battery excluded)
MP3 Decoding
WMA Decoding
AAC Decoding
MPEG-1/2 AUDIO Layer-3
Windows Media™ Audio
AAC-LC format “.m4a” file
•
•
Due to continuous product improvement, specifications and design
are subject to change without notice.
The LCD panel is manufactured using an extremely high precision
manufacturing technology. Its effective pixel ratio is over 99.99%.
This means that there is a possibility that 0.01% of the pixels could
be either always ON or OFF.
CD/DVD SECTION
Frequency Response
5 – 20,000 Hz ( 1dB)
Wow & Flutter (% WRMS) Below measurable limits
Total Harmonic Distortion
Dynamic Range
0.008% (at 1 kHz)
95 dB (at 1 kHz)
85 dB (at 1 kHz)
NTSC/PAL
Channel Separation
Signal system
Horizontal resolution
Video output level
Video S/N ratio
500 lines or greater
1Vp-p (75 ohms)
DVD: 60 dB
Audio S/N ratio
105 dB
PICKUP
CAUTION
Wave length
DVD: 666 nm
CD: 785 nm
CLASS II
Laser power
CAUTION-Laser radiation when open, DO NOT STARE INTO BEAM
(Bottom side of player)
119-EN
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Installation and Connections
Before installing or connecting the unit, please read the
proper use.
Caution
HAVE THE WIRING AND INSTALLATION DONE BY EXPERTS.
The wiring and installation of this unit requires special technical
skill and experience. To ensure safety, always contact the dealer
where you purchased this product to have the work done.
Warning
MAKE THE CORRECT CONNECTIONS.
Failure to make the proper connections may result in fire or product
damage.
USE SPECIFIED ACCESSORY PARTS AND INSTALL THEM
SECURELY.
Be sure to use only the specified accessory parts. Use of other than
designated parts may damage this unit internally or may not
securely install the unit in place. This may cause parts to become
loose resulting in hazards or product failure.
USE ONLY IN CARS WITH A 12 VOLT NEGATIVE GROUND.
(Check with your dealer if you are not sure.) Failure to do so may
result in fire, etc.
BEFORE WIRING, DISCONNECT THE CABLE FROM THE
ARRANGE THE WIRING SO IT IS NOT CRIMPED OR
PINCHED BY A SHARP METAL EDGE.
Route the cables and wiring away from moving parts (like the seat
rails) or sharp or pointed edges. This will prevent crimping and
damage to the wiring. If wiring passes through a hole in metal, use
a rubber grommet to prevent the wire’s insulation from being cut by
the metal edge of the hole.
NEGATIVE BATTERY TERMINAL.
Failure to do so may result in electric shock or injury due to
electrical shorts.
DO NOT ALLOW CABLES TO BECOME ENTANGLED IN
SURROUNDING OBJECTS.
Arrange wiring and cables in compliance with the manual to
prevent obstructions when driving. Cables or wiring that obstruct or
hang up on places such as the steering wheel, gear lever, brake
pedals, etc. can be extremely hazardous.
DO NOT INSTALL IN LOCATIONS WITH HIGH MOISTURE OR
DUST.
Avoid installing the unit in locations with high incidence of
moisture or dust. Moisture or dust that penetrates into this unit may
result in product failure.
DO NOT SPLICE INTO ELECTRICAL CABLES.
Never cut away cable insulation to supply power to other
equipment. Doing so will exceed the current carrying capacity of
the wire and result in fire or electric shock.
Precautions
DO NOT DAMAGE PIPE OR WIRING WHEN DRILLING
•
•
•
Be sure to disconnect the cable from the (–) battery post before
installing your INA-W910. This will reduce any chance of
damage to the unit in case of a short-circuit.
HOLES.
When drilling holes in the chassis for installation, take precautions
so as not to contact, damage or obstruct pipes, fuel lines, tanks or
electrical wiring. Failure to take such precautions may result in fire.
Be sure to connect the color coded leads according to the
diagram. Incorrect connections may cause the unit to
malfunction or damage to the vehicle’s electrical system.
When making connections to the vehicle’s electrical system, be
aware of the factory installed components (e.g. on-board
computer). Do not tap into these leads to provide power for this
unit. When connecting the INA-W910 to the fuse box, make sure
the fuse for the intended circuit of the
DO NOT USE BOLTS OR NUTS IN THE BRAKE OR STEERING
SYSTEMS TO MAKE GROUND CONNECTIONS.
Bolts or nuts used for the brake or steering systems (or any other
safety-related system), or tanks should NEVER be used for
installations or ground connections. Using such parts could disable
control of the vehicle and cause fire etc.
INA-W910 has the appropriate amperage. Failure to do so may
result in damage to the unit and/or the vehicle. When in doubt,
consult your Alpine dealer.
KEEP SMALL OBJECTS SUCH AS BATTERIES OUT OF THE
REACH OF CHILDREN.
Swallowing them may result in serious injury. If swallowed,
consult a physician immediately.
•
•
The INA-W910 uses female RCA-type jacks for connection to
other units (e.g. amplifier) having RCA connectors. You may
need an adaptor to connect other units. If so, please contact your
authorized Alpine dealer for assistance.
Be sure to connect the speaker (–) leads to the speaker (–)
terminal. Never connect left and right channel speaker cables to
each other or to the vehicle body.
DO NOT INSTALL IN LOCATIONS WHICH MIGHT HINDER
VEHICLE OPERATION, SUCH AS THE STEERING WHEEL OR
GEARSHIFT.
Doing so may obstruct forward vision or hamper movement etc.
and results in serious accident.
•
•
The Display must be completely retracted in the casing when
installing. If it is not, problems may occur.
When installing in automobiles, make sure the Display can open/
close without coming in contact with the gear shift.
IMPORTANT
SERIAL NUMBER:
Please record the serial number of your unit in the space provided
below and keep it as a permanent record. The serial number plate is
located on the bottom of the unit.
INSTALLATION DATE:
INSTALLATION TECHNICIAN:
PLACE OF PURCHASE:
120-EN
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3
Remove the mounting sleeve from the main unit (see
Installation
The unit can be installed in the mounting sleeve in
three positions by aligning its mounting holes (A to
C) on the sides of the unit. Position B is the factory
default position. If A or C are to be used, the hole
positions need to be modified.
First, take off the existing seal, then determine the
mounting position in the mounting sleeve and affix
the supplied seal (refer to “How to use a Seal”
Caution
Do not block the unit’s fan or heat sink, thus preventing
air circulation. If blocked, heat will accumulate inside
the unit and may cause a fire.
Air ventilation hole
Slide the unit into the mounting sleeve and secure it.
•
Make sure that there is a enough space depthwise before installing
the unit. If the unit is forcibly pushed into the mounting sleeve,
damage may occur.
Rear of the Unit
Mounting Sleeve (Included)
Dashboard
Caution concerning the installation location
This unit
1
Before installing, make sure that the opening and
closing of the display will not interfere with
operation of the gear shift.
Seal (Included)
Movable Display
Pressure Plates*1
Face Plate*2 (Included)
<Mounting Hole Position>
Position B
Position A
Position C
2
Angle of installation
•
Depending on the position chosen, the front panel will protrude
differently.
About the installation angle, please install as
horizontally as possible within the following angle
range. If the installation angle is beyond the range,
the current position may not be correctly displayed
and a maloperation may be caused for the
navigation mode.
Front Panel
Dashboard
Position A
0°
Front Panel
10°( 5°)
Front of the unit
Top of the unit
Dashboard
Position B
0-30°
Front Panel
Side of the unit
Dashboard
Position C
1
* If the installed mounting sleeve is loose in the dashboard, the
pressure plates may be bent slightly to remedy the problem.
121-EN
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
How to use a Seal
If A is used for installation:
Affix the seal so that mounting holes B and C are covered.
Reinforce the head unit with the metal mounting
strap (not supplied). Secure the ground lead of the
unit to a clean metal spot using a screw (* ) already
1
attached to the vehicle’s chassis.
2
•
For the screw marked “* ”, use an appropriate screw for the chosen
mounting location.
Connect each input lead coming from an amplifier or
equalizer to the corresponding output lead coming
from the left rear of the INA-W910. Connect all other
leads of the INA-W910 according to details
If B is used for installation:
Affix the seal so that mounting holes A and C are covered.
described in the CONNECTlONS section.
5
Slide the INA-W910 into the dashboard until it clicks.
This ensures that the unit is properly locked and will
not accidentally come out from the dashboard.
If C is used for installation:
Affix the seal so that the mounting holes A and B are covered.
Removal
1. Insert the bracket keys into the unit, along the guides
on either side. The unit can now be removed from the
mounting sleeve.
This unit
Bracket keys
(Included)
•
If the mounting sleeve is not used while installing the unit, please
stick the seal on A position to prevent the dust from entering the unit.
Installing the Face Plate
2
* If B is used, the supplied face plate may be mounted.
If A or C is used, the face plate cannot be mounted.
2. Pull the unit out, keeping it unlocked as you do so.
<JAPANESE CAR>
Take the face plate off, and secure the ground lead of the unit to
a clean metal spot using a screw (*) already attached to the
car’s chassis.
Attach the Original Mounting Bracket to each side of the
INA-W910, using the screws supplied with INA-W910.
4
Screw
Screws (M5 × 8) (Included)
Hex Nut (M5)
2
*
Bolt Stud
Ground Lead
Metal
Mounting
Strap
*
1
*
Mounting
Bracket
Face Plate (Included)
Ground Lead
This unit
Chassis
Chassis
122-EN
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Install the GPS antenna
<For inside vehicle>
1. Stick the ground pad at the center of dash board and close to windshield with one inch distance.
2. Attach GPS antenna to the center of ground pad. (the cable side faces the back of vehicle)
<For outside vehicle>
At the front or back of vehicle roof.
Wiring the GPS antenna cable
Do not bend or fold the GPS antenna cable.
•
When installing the INA-W910 to the vehicle, make sure the back of unit and the cable must not be bent.
Connect the GPS antenna
Securely connect the GPS antenna connector to INA-W910.
Connection of USB extension cable (included)
Connect the USB extension cable to the USB connector of the unit, and then secure the connection using the lock case supplied with USB extension
cable as shown below.
INA-W910
USB Connector
Cable (Supplied)
Foot Brake Lead / Parking Brake Lead Connection
Foot brake lamp
Foot brake lead
FOOT BRAKE
Foot brake switch
Pinch
(Yellow/Black)
Connector
INA-W910
(sold separately)
Chassis
PARKING BRAKE
(Yellow/Blue)
Parking brake lamp
Parking brake lead
Battery
Parking brake switch
Pinch
Connector
(sold separately)
Connection Diagram of SPST Switch (sold separately)
(If the ACC power supply is not available)
FUSE (5A)
SPST SW (Optional)
(Optional)
IGNITION
BATTERY
(Red)
(Yellow)
FUSE (20A)
(Optional)
INA-W910
Battery
•
•
•
If your vehicle has no ACC power supply, add an SPST (Single-Pole, Single-Throw) switch (sold separately) and fuse (sold separately).
The diagram and the fuse amperage shown above are in the case when INA-W910 is used individually.
If the switched power (ignition) lead of the INA-W910 is connected directly to the positive (+) post of the vehicle’s battery, the INA-W910 draws
some current (several hundred milliamperes) even when its switch is placed in the OFF position and the battery may be discharged.
To prevent external noise from entering the audio system.
•
•
•
•
Locate the unit and route the leads at least 10 cm away from the car harness.
Keep the battery power leads as far away from other leads as possible.
Connect the ground lead securely to a bare metal spot (remove any paint, dirt or grease if necessary) of the car chassis.
If you add an optional noise suppressor, connect it as far away from the unit as possible. Your Alpine dealer carries various
noise suppressors, contact them for further information.
•
Your Alpine dealer knows best about noise prevention measures so consult your dealer for further information.
123-EN
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Continue with the following operations after performing step 4 in
“Performing Calibration” of the owner’s manual of HCE-C300R. While
doing such operations, touch the button on the screen to select
“CHANGE” or “DONE” to perform calibration on this unit. Touching
[Corner] and [Back] on the screen of this unit performs the same
operation as pressing the switch which is supplied by HCE-C300R.
Calibration when connected to
HCE-C300R
Obstacle detection performance adjustment and guidance mark settings
of HCE-C300R (REAR VIEW CAMERA SYSTEM) require that
camera installation information be entered and calibration performed. If
camera information is not entered, accurate detection will not be
possible, so be sure to perform calibration.
For details on calibration, refer to “Calibration” in the owner’s manual
of HCE-C300R. To perform calibration with the supplied switch, refer
to “Performing Calibration” in the owner’s manual of HCE-C300R.
When connected to this unit, you can perform operations via the screen
of this unit.
Selects a desired item.
[Corner] = VIEW:
(The switch that is selected is enclosed by a
yellow frame.)
[Back] = SET.:
Executes the selection.
To activate the Calibration Setup Mode in this unit
1
2
3
Perform steps 1 and 2 in “Performing Calibration” of
the owner’s manual of HCE-C300R.
Press SOURCE/ on the unit.
The SOURCE selection screen is displayed.
Touch
(CAMERA).
The Camera mode is activated and the Top menu is
displayed.
4
Touch any area of the screen to display the view
change function keys.
•
Display example for Top menu screen
5
Touch [Back]
the instructions on the screen.
[Corner]
[Back] according to
The Setup Mode screen appears.
Display example for Setup mode screen
124-EN
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Connections
Antenna
REMOTE OUT
(White/Brown)
REMOTE IN
(White/Brown)
REVERSE
To remote input lead
To remote output lead
To plus side of the back
(Orange/White)
CAMERA SW
lamp signal lead of the car
Not used
(Black)
GUIDE CONT
To guide control input terminal
(White/Green)
(Black)
To steering remote control
interface box
Microphone
GPS Antenna
(Yellow)
(Red)
To Video Output terminal
To Audio Output terminals
(R, L)
(White)
(Yellow)
(Red)
To Video Input terminal
To Audio Input terminals
(R, L)
(White)
GUIDE
(Black)
To Guide Input terminal
CAMERA IN
(Yellow)
To Camera with RCA Output
terminal
To SiriusXM Tuner
Rear Left
Amplifier
Rear Right
Front Left
Amplifier
Front Right
Amplifier
Subwoofers
CD Changer
(sold separately)
REMOTE TURN-ON
(Blue/White)
POWER ANT
To amplifier or equalizer
To power antenna
Not used
(Blue)
AUDIO INTERRUPT IN
(Pink/Black)
PARKING BRAKE
To the parking brake
signal lead
To the foot brake cord
or brake lamp cord
(Yellow/Blue)
FOOT BRAKE
(Yellow/Black)
IGNITION
(Red)
Ignition key
BATTERY
(Yellow)
GND
or
(Black)
Battery
SPEAKER
RIGHT
REAR
(Violet)
SPEAKER
RIGHT
SPEAKER
LEFT
FRONT
SPEAKER
LEFT
REAR
(Green/
(White/
Black)
(Green)
(Violet/
Black)
(Gray)
FRONT
(Gray/
(White)
Black)
Black)
Speakers
To Flash memory/
To iPod/iPhone
Portable audio player
Front left
Rear left
Rear right
Front right
•
Set the system switch to “NORM” when only a changer is connected (when the Ai-NET compatible equalizer is not used). When the IMPRINT
audio processor is connected, set to EQ/DIV position.
* The system switch is located on the bottom of the unit.
125-EN
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Radio Antenna Receptacle
RCA Extension Cable (sold separately)
Remote Control Output Lead (White/Brown)
Connect this lead to the remote control input lead. This lead
outputs the controlling signals from the remote control.
Direct CAMERA Input Connector
Use when the optional direct camera is connected.
•
When an Alpine rearview camera HCE-C300R is used, please make
sure to connect it to this unit via Direct CAMERA Input Connector.
Remote Control Input Lead (White/Brown)
Connect the external Alpine product to the remote control
output lead.
iPod (V)/AUX Input Connector
Input the iPhone/video compatible iPod audio/video signal
Reverse Lead (Orange/White)
or AUX video/audio signal.
Use only when a back-up camera is connected. Connect to
the plus side of the car’s reverse lamp. This lamp illuminates
when the transmission is shifted into reverse (R).
With this lead properly wired, the video picture
automatically switches to the back-up camera whenever the
car is put into reverse (R).
•
•
Set “AUX2 IN” to “iPod Video” in “Setting the AUX2 Mode”
(page 67) when an iPhone or a video compatible iPod is connected.
Set “AUX2 IN” to “AUX” in “Setting the AUX2 Mode” (page 67)
when normal AUX video/audio is input.
GPS Antenna Receptacle
To GPS Antenna.
CAMERA SW Lead (Black)
Not used for this unit now.
MIC Input Connector
To Microphone (supplied).
Guide Control Lead (White/Green)
Use when an optional External Audio Processor with guide
control input terminal is connected.
Ai-NET Connector
Connect this to the output or input connector of another
device (CD Changer, Equalizer, etc.) equipped with Ai-NET.
Steering Remote Control Interface Connector (Black)
To steering remote control interface box.
For details about connections, consult your nearest Alpine
dealer.
•
Be sure to set “Setting the Connected Head Unit (MODEL SETUP)”
to “DVD CHG”, when the DHA-S690 is connected.
USB Connector
Video Input Connector (AUX INPUT) (Yellow)
Input the video.
AUX I/O / Camera Input Connector
RCA Output/Input Connector
Audio Input Connectors (AUX INPUT)
RED is right and WHITE is left input the audio.
System Switch
When connecting an equalizer or divider using Ai-NET
feature, place the switch in the EQ/DIV position. When no
device is connected, leave the switch in the NORM position.
Video Output Connector (AUX OUTPUT) (Yellow)
Output the video.
Audio Output Connectors (AUX OUTPUT)
RED is right and WHITE is left output the audio.
•
Be sure to turn the power off to the unit before changing the switch
position.
Guide Connector (Black)
Power Supply Connector
Output the audio signal of navigation interruption.
When connecting an IMPRINT Audio processor (PXA-H100)
or an external audio processor with Guide input terminal,
connect this lead to the Guide Input terminal with an
optional RCA Extension cable.
Digital Output Terminal (Optical)
Use when combining fiber optic digital input compatible
products. Be sure to use the Optical Digital Cable
(KWE-610A) (sold separately) only.
Ai-NET Cable (Included with CD Changer)
Camera Input RCA Connector (CAMERA IN)
Use when connecting an optional camera with RCA video
output connector.
Remote Turn-On Lead (Blue/White)
Connect this lead to the remote turn-on lead of your
amplifier or signal processor.
SiriusXM Tuner connector
Connect to a SiriusXM Tuner.
Refer to additional installations instructions included with
the SiriusXM tuner.
Power Antenna Lead (Blue)
Connect this lead to the +B terminal of your power antenna,
if applicable.
•
This lead should be used only for controlling the vehicle’s power
antenna. Do not use this lead to turn on an amplifier or a signal
processor, etc.
Rear Output/Input RCA Connectors
It can be used as Rear Output or Input RCA Connectors.
Front Output/Input RCA Connectors
It can be used as Front Output or Input RCA Connectors.
Audio Interrupt In Lead (Pink/Black)
Not used for this unit.
Subwoofer RCA Connectors
RED is right and WHITE is left.
Parking Brake Lead (Yellow/Blue)
Connect this lead to the power supply side of the parking
brake switch to transmit the parking brake status signals to
the INA-W910.
Foot Brake Lead (Yellow/Black)
Connect to the vehicle’s foot brake lead or brake lamp lead.
126-EN
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Switched Power Lead (Ignition) (Red)
Connect this lead to an open terminal on the vehicle’s fuse
box or another unused power source which provides (+)
12V only when the ignition is turned on or in the accessory
position.
Battery Lead (Yellow)
Connect this lead to the positive (+) post of the vehicle’s
battery.
Fuse Holder (10A)
Ground Lead (Black)
Connect this lead to a good chassis ground on the vehicle.
Make sure the connection is made to bare metal and is
securely fastened using the sheet metal screw provided.
Right Front (+) Speaker Output Lead (Gray)
Right Front (–) Speaker Output Lead (Gray/Black)
Right Rear (–) Speaker Output Lead (Violet/Black)
Right Rear (+) Speaker Output Lead (Violet)
Left Rear (+) Speaker Output Lead (Green)
Left Rear (–) Speaker Output Lead (Green/Black)
Left Front (–) Speaker Output Lead (White/Black)
Left Front (+) Speaker Output Lead (White)
USB extension cable (Included)
AV extension cable (Included)
USB 30P cable (Included)
127-EN
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
System Example
Connect the Ai-NET compatible audio processor (Fiber optic digital compatible) DVD player and changer.
Audio Processor (PXA-H701)
Guide Control
(Ai-NET) (Fiber Optic Digital
compatible) (sold separately)
Ai-NET
cable
Ai-NET cable
(Yellow)
DVD Video Player
(Ai-NET)
(DVA-5210, etc.)
(sold separately)
CD Changer
(Ai-NET)
(sold separately)
(White/Brown)
REMOTE IN
(White/Brown)
REMOTE OUT
Ai-NET cable
* Only connect fiber optic digital compatible CD Changer
Please observe the following when using Fiber Optic Cable (Optical Digital Cable).
•
•
•
Do not coil the Fiber Optic Cable smaller than a 30 mm radius.
Do not place anything on top of the Fiber Optic Cable.
Be careful not to bend the Fiber Optic Cable at a sharp angle.
Ai-NET Connector
Connect this to the output or input connector of other
product equipped with Ai-NET.
Video Input Connector (AUX INPUT) (Yellow)
Connect the video output lead of a DVD video player or
DVD changer to this terminal.
System Switch
AUX I/O / Camera Input Connector
When connecting an equalizer or divider using Ai-NET
feature, place the switch in the EQ/DIV position. When no
device is connected, leave the switch in the NORM position.
To Ai-NET Connector (Black)
Ai-NET Cable (Included with Audio Processor)
Ai-NET Cable (Included with CD Changer)
•
Be sure to turn the power off to the unit before changing the switch
position.
Guide Connector (Black)
Output the audio signal of navigation interruption.
Ai-NET Cable (Included with DVD video player)
RCA Extension Cable (sold separately)
Guide Input terminal
Remote Control Output Lead (White/Brown)
Connect this lead to the remote control input lead. This lead
outputs the controlling signals from the remote control.
Fiber Optic Cable (sold separately)
Digital Output Terminal (Optical)
Optical Digital Cable (KWE-610A) (sold separately)
To Ai-NET Connector (Gray)
RCA Extension Cable (Included with DVD video
player)
Guide Control Lead (White/Green)
Use when an optional External Audio Processor with guide
control input terminal is connected.
128-EN
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
When Connecting External Equipment
Direct camera HCE-C117D, etc.
(sold separately)
To Video Output terminal
Camera with RCA video output
(sold separately)
To Audio Input terminal
Rear monitor
(sold separately)
To Video Input terminal
To Video Output terminal
TV Tuner
(sold separately)
To Audio Output terminal
To Video Output terminal
DVE-5207, etc.
(sold separately)
To Audio Output terminal
(White/Brown)
(White/Brown)
REMOTE OUT
REMOTE IN
(White/Brown)
REMOTE IN
REVERSE
REMOTE OUT
(White/Brown)
(Orange/White)
Use only when back-up camera is connected.
System Switch
AV/RCA interface cable (4-pole mini AV plug to
3-RCA) (sold separately)
When connecting an IMPRINT audio processor or divider
using Ai-NET feature, place the switch in the EQ/DIV
position. When no device is connected, leave the switch in
the NORM position.
Usable 4-pole mini AV plug
Wiring convention of this system is as follows:
•
Be sure to turn the power off to the unit before changing the switch
position.
Audio L (White)
Audio R (Red)
Ground
AUX I/O / Camera Input Connector
Video (Yellow)
Camera Input RCA Connector (CAMERA IN)
Use when connecting an optional camera with RCA video
output connector.
Video/Audio Output Connectors (AUX OUTPUT)
Use when connecting an optional monitor etc.
Video/Audio Input Connectors (AUX INPUT)
•
Configuration commercially available 4-pole mini AV plugs is not
unified.
iPod (V)/AUX Input Connector
Input the iPhone/video compatible iPod audio/video signal
or AUX video/audio signal.
•
•
Set “AUX2 IN” to “AUX” in “Setting the AUX2 Mode” (page 67)
when normal AUX video/audio is input.
When you use this connector as normal video/audio input connector
(AUX 2 Input), an optional AV/RCA interface cable should be used.
For details, refer to
.
129-EN
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Video/Audio Input Connectors
YELLOW is for input video, RED is right and WHITE is left
input the audio.
Remote Control Output Lead (White/Brown)
Connect this lead to the remote control input lead. This lead
outputs the controlling signals from the remote control.
Remote Control Input Lead (White/Brown)
Reverse Lead (Orange/White)
Use only when a back-up camera is connected. Connect to
the plus side of the car’s reverse lamp. This lamp illuminates
when the transmission is shifted into reverse (R).
With this lead properly wired, the video picture
automatically switches to the back-up camera whenever the
car is put into reverse (R).
RCA Extension Cable (sold separately)
Direct CAMERA Input Connector
Use when the optional direct camera is connected.
Camera extension cable (Included with direct
camera)
About the Rules of Bluetooth Electromagnetic Radiation Regulation
USA/Canada
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and RSS-Gen of IC Rules. Operation is
subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause interference, and (2) this
device must accept any interference, including interference that may cause undesired operation
of this device.
FCC WARNING
Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could
void the user’s authority to operate the equipment.
130-EN
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
LIMITED WARRANTY
ALPINE ELECTRONICS OF AMERICA, INC. AND ALPINE OF CANADA INC. (“Alpine”), are dedicated to quality craftsmanship and
are pleased to offer this Warranty. We suggest that you read it thoroughly. Should you have any questions, please contact your Dealer
or contact Alpine at one of the telephone numbers listed below.
C You must supply proof of your purchase of the product.
PRODUCTS COVERED:
D You must package the product securely to avoid damage
during shipment. To prevent lost packages it is
recommended to use a carrier that provides a tracking
service.
This Warranty covers Car Audio Products and Related
Accessories (“the product”). Products purchased in the Canada
are covered only in the Canada. Products purchased in the
U.S.A. are covered only in the U.S.A.
HOW WE LIMIT IMPLIED WARRANTIES:
LENGTH OF WARRANTY:
ANY IMPLIED WARRANTIES INCLUDING FITNESS FOR USE
AND MERCHANTABILITY ARE LIMITED IN DURATION TO
THE PERIOD OF THE EXPRESS WARRANTY SET FORTH
ABOVE AND NO PERSON IS AUTHORIZED TO ASSUME FOR
ALPINE ANY OTHER LIABILITY IN CONNECTION WITH THE
SALE OF THE PRODUCT.
This Warranty is in effect for one year from the date of the first
consumer purchase.
WHO IS COVERED:
This Warranty only covers the original purchaser of the product,
who must reside in the United States, Puerto Rico or Canada.
WHAT IS COVERED:
This Warranty covers defects in materials or workmanship (parts
and labor) in the product.
HOW WE EXCLUDE CERTAIN DAMAGES:
ALPINE EXPRESSLY DISCLAIMS LIABILITY FOR
INCIDENTAL AND CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES CAUSED BY
THE PRODUCT. THE TERM “INCIDENTAL DAMAGES”
REFERS TO EXPENSES OF TRANSPORTING THE
PRODUCT TO THE ALPINE SERVICE CENTER, LOSS OF
THE ORIGINAL PURCHASER’S TIME, LOSS OF THE USE OF
THE PRODUCT, BUS FARES, CAR RENTALS OR OTHERS
COSTS RELATING TO THE CARE AND CUSTODY OF THE
PRODUCT. THE TERM “CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES”
REFERS TO THE COST OF REPAIRING OR REPLACING
OTHER PROPERTY WHICH IS DAMAGED WHEN THIS
PRODUCT DOES NOT WORK PROPERLY. THE REMEDIES
PROVIDED UNDER THIS WARRANTY ARE EXCLUSIVE AND
IN LIEU OF ALL OTHERS.
WHAT IS NOT COVERED:
This Warranty does not cover the following:
A Damage occurring during shipment of the product to Alpine
for repair (claims must be presented to the carrier).
B Damage caused by accident or abuse, including burned
voice coils caused by over-driving the speaker (amplifier level
is turned up and driven into distortion or clipping). Speaker
mechanical failure (e.g. punctures, tears or rips). Cracked or
damaged LCD panels. Dropped or damaged hard drives.
C Damage caused by negligence, misuse, improper operation
or failure to follow instructions contained in the Owner’s
manual.
D Damage caused by act of God, including without limitation,
earthquake, fire, flood, storms or other acts of nature.
Any cost or expense related to the removal or reinstallation of
the product.
E Service performed by an unauthorized person, company or
association.
F Any product which has the serial number defaced, altered or
removed.
G Any product which has been adjusted, altered or modified
without Alpine’s consent.
HOW STATE/PROVINCIAL LAW RELATES TO THE
WARRANTY:
This Warranty gives you specific legal rights, and you may also
have other rights which vary from state to state and province to
province. In addition, some states/provinces do not allow
limitations on how long an implied warranty lasts, and some do
not allow the exclusion or limitation of incidental or
consequential damages. Accordingly, limitations as to these
matters contained herein may not apply to you.
IN CANADA ONLY:
H Any product not distributed by Alpine within the United
States, Puerto Rico or Canada.
I Any product not purchased from an Authorized Alpine
Dealer.
This Warranty is not valid unless your Alpine car audio product
has been installed in your vehicle by an Authorized Installation
Center, and this warranty stamped upon installation by the
installation center.
HOW TO OBTAIN WARRANTY SERVICE:
A You are responsible for delivery of the product to an
Authorized Alpine Service Center or Alpine for repair and for
payment of any initial shipping charges. Alpine will, at its
option, repair or replace the product with a new or
reconditioned product without charge. If the repairs are
covered by the warranty, and if the product was shipped to an
Authorized Alpine Service Center or Alpine, Alpine will pay
the return shipping charges.
HOW TO CONTACT CUSTOMER SERVICE:
Should the product require service, please call the following
number for your nearest Authorized Alpine Service Center.
CAR AUDIO
NAVIGATION
1-800-ALPINE-1 (1-800-257-4631)
1-888-NAV-HELP (1-888-628-4357)
Or visit our website at; http://www.alpine-usa.com
B You should provide a detailed description of the problem(s)
for which service is required.
ALPINE ELECTRONICS OF AMERICA, INC., 19145 Gramercy Place, Torrance, California 90501, U.S.A.
ALPINE ELECTRONICS OF CANADA, INC., 777 Supertest Road, Toronto, Ontario M3J 2M9, Canada
Do not send products to these addresses.
Call the toll free telephone number or visit the website to locate a service center.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
|